Lenze 8200 motec L-force 8400 Frequency inverter Software Manual 2

Lenze 8200 motec L-force 8400 Frequency inverter Software Manual 2
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
L-force Drives
Ä.>6Iä
EDS84AVBDxx
13292140
Software Manual
8400
E84AVBDExxxxxx0
8400 BaseLine D Inverter Drives
L
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Overview of the technical documentation for Inverter Drives 8400
Overview of the technical documentation for Inverter Drives 8400
Project planning, selecting & ordering
Legend:
8400 Hardware Manual
 Printed documentation
 Catalogue
Online documentation
(PDF/»Engineer« online help)
Mounting & wiring
Abbreviations used
 MA 8400 BaseLine/8400StateLine/HighLine
BA Operating Instructions
 MA for communication module
KHB Communication Manual
 MA for extension module
MA Mounting Instructions
 MA for safety module
SW Software Manual
 MA for accessories
Parameter setting
 BA keypad
SW 8400 BaseLine C
SW 8400 BaseLine D
Í This documentation
SW 8400 StateLine
SW 8400 HighLine
KHB for communication module
Commissioning of the drive
 Commissioning guide
SW 8400 StateLine/HighLine
 Chapter "Commissioning"
 Chapter "Oscilloscope"
 Chapter "Diagnostics & fault analysis"
Networking
KHB for communication medium used
2
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Contents
Contents
1
2
3
About this documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
1.1
Document history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
1.2
Conventions used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
1.3
Terminology used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
1.4
Definition of notes used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
2.1
Functions of the frequency inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
2.2
Memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
2.3
Communicating with the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.1 Going online via diagnostic adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
15
2.4
Internal Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
3.1
Before switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
3.2
Parameter setting and diagnosing directly at the controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2 Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.3 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
24
25
26
3.3
Test commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1 Test commissioning with keypad control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.2 Test commissioning with terminal control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
29
31
3.4
Commissioning of the drive application with the »Engineer« . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1 Observe the safety measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2 Open the »Engineer« . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3 Load the Lenze setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.4 Make motor settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.5 Select control source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.6 Start program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.7 Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
34
35
36
36
37
39
40
3.5
Password protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1 Entry of a password not available yet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2 Delete or change available password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.3 Access password-protected controller without knowing the password. . . . . .
3.5.4 Reach password-protected menu level with knowing the password . . . . . . . .
41
42
43
44
45
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
3
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Contents
4
4
Drive control (DCTRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47
4.1
Device states. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.1 "Init" state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.2 "MotorIdent" status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.3 "SafeTorqueOff" state. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.4 "ReadyToSwitchON" state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.5 "SwitchedON" state. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.6 "OperationEnabled" state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.7 Status display "Warning". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.8 "Trouble" state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.9 "Fault" state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48
49
50
50
51
53
53
53
54
55
4.2
Controller commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2 Overview of device commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.3 Status display for device command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.4 Load Lenze setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.5 Save parameter set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.6 Load parameter set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
56
59
59
60
60
61
4.3
System block "LS_DriveInterface" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
63
4.4
Parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.2 Saving of the parameters in the memory module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.3 Handling of the memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.4 Non-volatile saving of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.5 Parameter set transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.6 Parameters for status display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.7 Set/remove controller inhibit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
66
67
68
69
69
70
70
4.5
Activate/deactivate quick stop function (QSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Contents
5
Motor control (MCTRL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
5.1
Selection of the operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1 V/f characteristic control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1.1
Parameter setting of the V/f characteristic control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1.2
Optimisation of operational performance by slip compensation . .
5.1.1.3
Optimisation of the Imax controller setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
77
79
83
85
5.1.2
Vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.2.1
Sensorless vector control (SLVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic motor parameter identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
87
93
5.2
Motor selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1 Manual parameter setting of external motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
95
96
5.3
Selection of the switching frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
97
5.4
Definition of current and speed limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.1 Definition of speed limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.2 Definition of current limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
99
99
100
5.5
Flying restart function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
101
101
5.6
DC-injection braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.1 Manual DC-injection braking (DCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.2 Automatic DC-injection braking (Auto-DCB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.3 Oscillation damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
103
104
105
107
5.7
Signal flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
108
5.8
System block "LS_MotorInterface" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
110
5.9
Monitoring functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.9.1 Motor temperature monitoring with I²xt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
111
5.1.3
6
I/O terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
6.1
Analog input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.1 Terminal assignment/electrical data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.2 Parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.3 Using the analog input as current input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.4 System block "LS_AnalogInput". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
116
117
118
118
119
6.2
Digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.1 Terminal assignment/electrical data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.2 Parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.3 System block "LS_DigitalInput" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
120
120
120
121
6.3
Digital outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.1 Terminal assignment/electrical data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.2 Parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.3 Function block "LS_DigitalOutput". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
122
122
123
123
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
5
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Contents
7
8
6
Error management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
7.1
Basics on error handling in the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
125
7.2
Drive diagnostics with the »Engineer«. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
125
7.3
Logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.1 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.2 Reading out logbook entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
130
131
7.4
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.1 Setting the error response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.2 Monitoring of the device utilisation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
132
133
133
7.5
Error messages of the operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.1 Error number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.1.1
Structure of the error number (bit coding). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.1.2
Error type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.1.3
Error subject area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.1.4
Error ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.1.5
Example for bit coding of the error number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.2 Reset of error message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.3 Short overview (A-Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.4 Cause & possible remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
134
134
134
134
134
135
135
136
137
138
Drive Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
8.1
Overview of the software structure of the drive application function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.1 Input and output interconnection of the drive application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.2 Functions of the drive application "Actuating drive - speed" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.3 Pre-assignment of the drive application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
142
143
144
146
8.2
Interface description of the drive application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
148
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Contents
9
Function library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
9.1
10
11
Function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.1 L_NSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.1.1
Main setpoint path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.1.2
JOG setpoints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.1.3
Setpoint inversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.1.4
Ramp function generator for the main setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.1.5
S-shaped ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.2 L_MPot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.2.1
Activation & control of motor potentiometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.2.2
Deactivation of motor potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.2.3
Save current output value after mains failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.3 L_PCTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.3.1
Control characteristic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.3.2
Ramp function generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.3.3
Value range of the output signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.3.4
Evaluation of the output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.3.5
Deactivation of the process controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.4 L_RLQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.5 LS_DisFree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.6 LS_DisFree_a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.7 LS_DisFree_b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.8 LS_ParFix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.9 LS_ParFree_b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.10 LS_ParFree_a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
153
153
154
155
155
156
156
157
159
160
160
161
164
165
165
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
Parameter reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
10.1 Structure of the parameter descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.1 Data type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.2 Parameters with read-only access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.3 Parameters with write access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.3.1 Parameters with setting range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.3.2 Parameters with selection list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.3.3 Parameters with bit-coded setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.3.4 Parameters with subcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.4 Parameter attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
176
177
177
178
178
178
179
180
180
10.2 Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
182
10.3 Table of attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
227
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Your opinion is important to us. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
235
7
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Contents
8
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
About this documentation
Document history
1
About this documentation

Danger!
The controller is a source of danger which may lead to death or severe injury of
persons.
To protect yourself and others against these dangers, observe the safety
instructions before switching on the controller.
Please read the safety instructions provided in the 8400 Mounting Instructions
and in the 8400 Hardware Manual. Both documents are supplied with the
controller.
This Software Manual contains information about the parameterisation of the
8400 BaseLine D controller using the L-force »Engineer« and the keypad.
The information given in this Software Manual applies to the 8400 BaseLine D frequency
inverter with the following nameplate data:
Type
Type designation
From software
version
Important
8400 BaseLine D
E84AVBDExxxxSX0
2.1
Variant without digital output X4/DO1
8400 BaseLine D
E84AVBDExxxxSX1
2.1
Variant with digital output X4/DO1
Digital outputs ( 122)
8400 BaseLine D
E84AVBDExxxxxx0
3.0
New function block L_PCTRL
 Tip!
Current documentation and software updates for Lenze products can be found on
the Internet in the "Services & Downloads" area under
http://www.Lenze.com
1.1
Document history
Version
1.0
Description
06/2008
TD06 First edition
2.0
07/2008
TD 06 Second edition
3.0
02/2009
TD 06 New: The chapters "Commissioning" and "Parameter reference" have been revised,
new block L_RLQ (CW/CCW rotation)
4.0
04/2009
TD 06 New: Subcode c012 in C002 for adaption of parameter sets from controllers with
firmware version ≤ V2.1 in the event of service.
5.0
04/2009
TD 06 New:
• Function block L_PCTRL
• Quick saving at the push of a button ( 61)
• Parameter list with info texts
5.1
11/2009
TD06 Changes compared to previous issue affects the parameter C018 and the drawings
[8-2] , [8-3]
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
9
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
About this documentation
Conventions used
1.2
Conventions used
This Software Manual uses the following conventions to distinguish between different
types of information:
Type of information
Variable identifier
Writing
Examples/notes
Italics
By setting bEnable to TRUE...
Bold
The OK button... / The Copy command... / The Properties tab... / The
Name input field...
Window
Control element
The Message window... / The Options dialog box...
Sequence of
menu commands
Shortcut
If several commands must be used in sequence to carry out a function,
then the individual commands are separated by an arrow: Select
FileOpen to...
<Bold>
Press <F1> to open the Online Help.
If a command requires a combination of keys, a "+" is placed between
the key symbols: Use <Shift>+<ESC> to...
Hyperlink
Step-by-step
instructions
1.3
10
Underlined

A hyperlink is an optically highlighted reference which is activated by a
mouse click.
Step-by-step instructions are indicated by a pictograph.
Terminology used
Term
Meaning
»Engineer«
Lenze PC software which supports you in "engineering" (parameterisation,
diagnostics and configuration) throughout the whole life cycle, i.e. from
planning to maintenance of the commissioned machine.
Application block
Block for a drive application (e.g. actuating drive - speed)
A drive application is a drive solution provided with the experiences and
know-how of Lenze in which function blocks interconnected to a signal flow
form the basis for implementing typical drive tasks.
Code
Parameter used for controller parameter setting or monitoring.
The term is usually called "index".
Display codes
Parameter that displays the current status or value of a system block input/
output.
FB Editor
Function block editor
Graphical interconnection tool which is provided for signal interconnections
in the »Engineer« on the FB editor tab and by means of which the
applications integrated in the drive can also be reconfigured and extended
by individual functions.
Function block
A function block can be compared with an integrated circuit that contains a
certain control logic and delivers one or several values when being executed.
• Each function block has a unique identifier (the instance name) and a
processing number which defines the position at which the function
block is calculated during the task cycle.
Lenze setting
This setting is the default factory setting of the device.
Port block
Block for implementing the process data transfer via a fieldbus
QSP
Quick stop
SC
Operating mode: Servo Control
SLVC
Operating mode: SensorLess Vector Control
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
About this documentation
Terminology used
Term
Meaning
Subcode
If a code contains several parameters, the individual parameters are stored
under "subcodes".
This manual uses a slash "/" as a separator between code and subcode
(e.g. "C118/3").
The term is usually called "subindex".
System block
System blocks provide interfaces to basic functions and to the hardware of
the controller in the FB editor of the »Engineer« (e.g. to the digital inputs).
VFCplus
Operating mode: V/f characteristic control ("Voltage Frequency Control")
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
11
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
About this documentation
Definition of notes used
1.4
Definition of notes used
The following signal words and symbols are used in this Software Manual to indicate
dangers and important information:
Safety instructions
Layout of the safety instructions:

Pictograph and signal word!
(characterise the type and severity of danger)
Note
(describes the danger and informs how to prevent dangerous situations)
Pictograph
Signal word
Meaning

Danger!
Danger of personal injury through dangerous electrical voltage
Reference to an imminent danger that may result in death or serious personal injury
if the corresponding measures are not taken.

Danger!
Danger of personal injury through a general source of danger
Reference to an imminent danger that may result in death or serious personal injury
if the corresponding measures are not taken.

Stop!
Danger of property damage
Reference to a possible danger that may result in property damage if the
corresponding measures are not taken.
Application notes
Pictograph
12
Signal word
Meaning

Note!
Important note to ensure trouble-free operation

Tip!
Useful tip for easy handling
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Product description
Functions of the frequency inverter
2
Product description
2.1
Functions of the frequency inverter
 Memory module for parameter transfer and quick and easy device replacement
 Approved for use in balanced supply systems (TN systems)
 Wide input voltage range up to 500V (+10%) for a worldwide application without using
additional transformers
 Approvals CE, UL
 High overload capacity up to 200% for generating high breakaway torques and for a
fault-tolerant operation
 Integrated brake transistor (brake chopper) only available with devices operating at
400 V / 500 V.
 Integrated interface for diagnostics via PC with extensive diagnostic options
 Integrated protective functions
 Adjustable warning levels for a simplified and safe machine maintenance (e.g. motor
operating time)
 Adjustable password to protect your parameter setting
 Saving of all parameters at the push of a button
 Relay output
 DC connection
 Integrated EMC shield connections for control cables
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
13
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Product description
Memory module
2.2
Memory module

Danger!
After switching off the mains, wait three minutes before working on the
controller. If you want to remove the memory module, make sure that the
controller is deenergised.
The memory module is a memory location for the drive parameters of the 8400 BaseLine.
The pluggable design especially serves to
 restore an application after a device has been exchanged.
 duplicate identical drive tasks within the 8400 BaseLine frequency inverter series.
 Tip!
For duplication, we recommend to use the optionally available EPM Programmer.
Exchange of the memory module
By default, the memory module is positioned in the EPM slot at the front of the controller
(see arrow).
To avoid confusion with other Lenze products, the memory modules of the 8400 BaseLine
frequency inverter series are grey. The exchange of these memory modules among each
other is possible without any problems.
More details on the handling can be found in the 8400 hardware manual which is part of
the data medium included in the scope of supply.
[2-1]
14
Positioning of the grey memory module at the front of the 8400 BaseLine
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Product description
Communicating with the controller
2.3
Communicating with the controller
The following interface can be used to build up communication between PC and controller:
 Diagnostic interface X6/Going online via diagnostic adapter
2.3.1
Going online via diagnostic adapter
For the initial commissioning of the controller, you can use, for instance, the diagnostic
adapter offered by Lenze:

Note!
Please observe the documentation for the diagnostic adapter!
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
15
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Product description
Communicating with the controller
Preconditions:
 The diagnostic adapter is connected to diagnostic interface X6 on the controller and to
a free USB port on the PC.
 The driver required for the diagnostic adapter is installed.
 The controller is supplied with mains power via X100.

Stop!
If you change parameters in the »Engineer« while the controller is connected
online, the changes will be directly accepted by the controller!
 How to build up an online connection via the diagnostic adapter:
1. Select the 8400 BaseLine controller to which you want to build up an online
connection in the Project view of the »Engineer«:
2. Click the
icon or select the command OnlineGo online.
• If no online connection has been configured for the selected controller so far,
the Device assignment offline devices dialog box will be displayed:
• The dialog box also appears if the online connection is built up via the command
OnlineGo online instead of using the toolbar icon.
3. Select the "Diagnostic adapter" entry from the Bus connection list field.
16
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Product description
Communicating with the controller
4. Click Find device access path to find the controller in the selected bus system.
• The Address assignment dialog box appears:
5. Select the corresponding controller from the Field devices located list field.
6. Click OK.
• The Address assignment dialog box is closed and the selected Device access path
(e.g. "DDCMP:/") is indicated in the Device assignment offline devices dialog box.
7. Click Connect.
• The dialog box is closed and the online connection with the controller is built up.
• When an online connection with the controller exists, this is indicated in the
Project view - by a yellow icon and
- by the word "ONLINE" in the status bar:
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
17
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Product description
Communicating with the controller
Now you can use the icons
and
to easily build up and end a connection with the
controller. The communication settings are only required when communication with a
controller is built up for the first time.
 If you want to change the existing configuration, select the command OnlineGo
online to open the Device assignment offline devices dialog box and change the settings.
 With an online connection, the »Engineer« displays the current parameter settings of
the controller with a yellow background colour.
 When the background colour changes from yellow to red, the connection with the
controller has been interrupted.
18
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Product description
Internal Keypad
2.4
Internal Keypad
Display elements and control panel
1
C
A
B
8888
D
E
F
ESC
Symbol
Information
c
4-character display with LEDs (A ... F)
Meaning
A
orange
B
yellow
Minus sign for identifying the negative numbers with more than 3 digits.
C
yellow
User-LED, can be configured via C621/42
D
red
See Signalling of the LEDs "D" and "E" ( 25)
E
green
F
yellow
Set current/torque limit is reached
Direction of rotation, CCW rotation
Off
Rotational direction CW
blinking
Commanded direction does not (yet) equal the actual direction - for example
during reversing
ESC
Escape key
back
↵
Enter key
Short: Next / confirmation
3 seconds: Save all parameters

Navigation key,
upwards

Navigation key,
downwards
Short:
Navigation in the menu level and parameter level and parameter editing
Long (> 2 seconds):
Fast scrolling function
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
19
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Product description
Internal Keypad
20
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Commissioning
Before switching on
3
Commissioning
3.1
Before switching on

Danger!
• Continuous operation at low field frequency with rated motor current may
lead to thermal overload when self-ventilated machines are used. If required,
motor temperature monitoring should be activated with C120
Motor temperature monitoring with I²xt ( 111).
• If an asynchronous motor with the nameplate data 400 V  /230 V  is deltaconnected to a frequency inverter for 400 V mains supply voltage, set code
C015 (V/f base frequency) to 87 Hz.
In order to prevent injury to persons or damage to material assets, check
 before connecting the mains voltage:
– Wiring for completeness, short circuit, and earth fault
– The "emergency stop" function of the entire system
– The motor circuit configuration (star/delta) must be adapted to the output voltage
of the controller
– The in-phase connection of the motor
 the setting of the most important drive parameters before enabling the controller:
– Is the V/f rated frequency adapted to the motor circuit configuration?
– Are the drive parameters relevant for your application set correctly?
– Is the configuration of the analog and digital inputs and outputs adapted to the
wiring?
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
21
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Commissioning
Before switching on
 Tip!
In the Lenze setting, the "linear V/f characteristic" mode is set as motor control. The
parameter settings are preset so that, if the frequency inverter and the 50 Hz
asynchronous machine match in terms of power, the controller is immediately
ready for operation without any further parameter setting expense and the motor
operates satisfactorily.
Recommendations for the following application cases:
• If the frequency inverter and the motor differ widely in terms of power,  set
Imax ( C022) to 2.0 IN(motor).
• If a high starting torque is required
 set Vmin boost ( C016) in motor idle state so that the rated motor current (
C058) flows at a field frequency of f = 3Hz.
• For noise optimisation
 set the switching frequency ( C018) to "3" (16 kHzsin var).
• If you need a high torque at low speed we recommend the control mode “vector
control".
22
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Commissioning
Parameter setting and diagnosing directly at the controller
3.2
Parameter setting and diagnosing directly at the controller
Parameter setting
The front of the controller is provided with control elements which serve to access the
parameters (also called codes) stored in the controller.
 An overview with a corresponding description of the codes can be found in chapter
Parameter reference ( 175).
 An overview of the menu structure of the internal keypad can be found in chapter
Menu structure ( 24).
Diagnosing
The optical display of the internal keypad shows important status information of the
controller by LEDs. The positions of the coloured LEDs are marked on the housing by letters.
 More information on diagnostics options and messages can be found in the chapters
Diagnostics ( 25)
Messages ( 26)
 The different controller states are described in chapter
Device states ( 48)
 Tip!
Extensive parameter settings and configurations should be carried out with the Lforce »Engineer«. If you want to use the L-force »Engineer«, the online help and the
software documentation for the controller will support you.
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
23
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Commissioning
Parameter setting and diagnosing directly at the controller
3.2.1
Menu structure

Note!
• After switching on the controller, the internal keypad performs a quick selftest. All segments of the display flash for approx. 3 seconds. After that the
display switches to the display which indicates the setpoint speed of the
motor. The internal keypad is now operational.
• When the password protection is activated and no password is input, only the
user menu is freely accessible. All other functions require the correct
password.
Status
......
PASS
CAL
CAL/Stop
CAl/Err
bF
CL
FCL
Fst
dEC
br
Menu
Password
PASS
5 sec.
....
0000
_
`
-5_
`
....
....
_
Code
Š
C_ _ _
_
`
....
Action
Subcode
Š
c_ _ _
_
`
....
Š
0001
_
`
....
`
-2-
_
`
-1-
_
`
-0-
Menu
-0- , Access to all parameters selected by the user under C517.
-1- , Access to all drive parameters.
-2- , Access to parameters for fast commissioning with terminals.
-3- , Access to parameters for fast commissioning with internal keypad.
-4- , Access to motor control parameters.
-5- , Access to diagnostic parameters.
24
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Commissioning
Parameter setting and diagnosing directly at the controller
3.2.2
Diagnostics
1
C
A
B
8888
D
E
F
ESC
Symbol
Information
c
4-character display with LEDs (A ... F)
Meaning
A
orange
Set current/torque limit is reached
B
yellow
Minus sign for identifying the negative numbers bigger than 4 characters when the rotational
direction has been reversed
C
yellow
User LED, configurable via C621/42, user-defined LED status
D
red
DRIVE ERROR, see the following table
E
green
Drive ready (no error occurred), see the following table
F
yellow
Direction of rotation, CCW rotation
Off
Rotational direction CW
blinking
Commanded direction is not equal to actual direction- for example during reversing
ESC
Escape key
Abort
↵
Enter key
Confirmation / save parameter

upwards

downwards
Short pressing: Navigation on menu and parameter level, parameter processing, long pressing (> 2
seconds): Quick scroll function
LED E = DRV-RDY
LED D = DRV-ERR
OFF
Status
OFF
"Init" state
OFF
"ReadyToSwitchON" state
OFF
"SwitchedON" state
OFF
"OperationEnabled" state
Status display "Warning"
The controller is ready to switch on, switched on or the operation is enabled and a warning
is indicated.
OFF
"Trouble" state
OFF
"Fault" state
The symbols used to represent the LED states have the following meanings:
LED flashes once approx. every three seconds (slow flash)
LED flashes once approx. every 1.25 seconds ( flash)
LED flashes twice approx. every 1.25 seconds (double flash)
LED blinks every second
LED is permanently on
[3-1]
Signalling of the LEDs "D" and "E"
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
25
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Commissioning
Parameter setting and diagnosing directly at the controller
3.2.3
Messages
The current status of the controller is constituted via
ƒ six coloured LEDs, see Signalling of the LEDs "D" and "E"
( 25)
ƒ messages:
26
Message
Meaning
PASS
Password input
CAL
blinking
Identification is in progress. Operation is not enabled yet.
CAL / Stop
alternatively blinking
Identification is ready to start
CAL / Err
alternatively blinking
Identification is not ready to start. Either C088, or C089, or
C090 is 0.
bF
blinking
Identification error. Drive ID stored in EMP does not match
the drive ID stored in the controller.
CL
constant
CL: Clamp
Current limit set in C022 is reached.
FCL
constant
Fast current limit value (higher than value set in C022) is
reached
FSt
constant
Flying start is in progress
dec
constant
Deceleration is temporarily suspended because of higher bus
voltage
br
flashes during the hold time of the
DC brake
DC brake is in progress
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Commissioning
Test commissioning
3.3
Test commissioning

Danger!
The controller is a source of danger which may lead to death or severe injury of
persons.
To protect yourself and others against these dangers, observe the safety
instructions before switching on the controller.
Please read the safety instructions provided in the 8400 Mounting Instructions
and in the 8400 Hardware Manual. Both documents are supplied with the
controller.
Only a few parameters need to be adapted for the drive. Afterwards, the drive application
can be immediately controlled via the digital and analog inputs of the controller.
 Tip!
For initial commissioning of the frequency inverter, the drive application is
preconfigured with the terminal control in the Lenze setting.
Commissioning step
Action
Connect I/Os
Enter the I/O connection
• C007: Selection from table (-->terminals, 10)
Parameterise application
Set speed setpoint
• C011: Define reference speed in [rpm]
• C012: Set acceleration time in [s]
• C013: Set deceleration time in [s]
• C105: Set QSP deceleration time in [s]
• Further codes, e.g. jog values, TI times, brake management, etc.
Saving and testing
Save parameter set ( 60)
• Save parameter set 1 (-->C002/7 = 1)
• Save all parameter sets (-->C002/11 = 1)
• Save all parameter sets at the push of a button
• Save all parameter changes automatically with mains failure protection
(---> C141/1)
Further parameters can be used to assign the settings of the actual values to other
interfaces.
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
27
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Commissioning
Test commissioning
Target of the "test commissioning"
For test and demonstration purposes, the motor is to start to rotate with as few wiring and
settings as possible in best time.
Keypad control or terminal control
First decide how the controller is to be controlled during test commissioning:
 Test commissioning with keypad control
( 29)
 Test commissioning with terminal control
( 31)
 Tip!
The operation and commissioning of the internal keypad is described in the
Hardware Manual of the 8400 frequency inverter. The index of the CD attached to
the device as scope of supply contains the Hardware Manual saved as PDF.
A detailed description of how to use the integrated keypad can be found in this
manual in the chapter
Parameter setting and diagnosing directly at the controller ( 23)
28
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Commissioning
Test commissioning
3.3.1
Test commissioning with keypad control
Commissioning steps
1. Wire the power connections
Make use of the Mounting Instructions supplied with the frequency inverter to
wire the power terminals according to the requirements of your device.
2. Wire the control connections
Digital inputs at terminal X4
X4
DO1 24E DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 RFR 12I
Assignment
Info
RFR
• Controller enable
RFR = high
• Error reset
High → low (edge-controlled)
AR A1U GND
3. If you are sure that the state of the frequency inverter is as delivered from the
manufacturer (Lenze setting), you can skip this commissioning step.
If not, restore the Lenze setting on the frequency inverter:
Status
8888
Menu
Password
PASS
5 sec.
....
....
0000
_
`
Code
_
....
`
-1-
_
Š
C002
_
Action
Subcode
`
....
Š
c001
_
`
....
Š
01
_
`
....
`
-0-
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
[3-2]
Select menu -1- (all parameters)
Press "Enter" key
Set code C002
Press "Enter" key
Set subcode C001
Press "Enter" key
Set value "01"
Press "Enter" key
Setting / resetting the Lenze setting
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
29
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Commissioning
Test commissioning
4. Set keypad control
Status
Menu
Password
0000
PASS
5 sec.
....
0000
_
....
_
`
`
Code
Š
_
`
....
Š
_
C007
....
-3_
_
Action
Subcode
`
0020
`
`
C...
_
-2_
`
`
C002
-1-
_
`
-0-
•
•
•
•
•
•
Select menu -3- (quick commissioning with integrated keypad)
Press "Enter" key
Set code C007
Press "Enter" key
Set value "20"
Press "Enter" key
5. Enable the controller:
Set terminal X4/RFR to HIGH potential (X4/12I).
6. Use the keypad to change the motor velocity or
the motor speed by selecting different fixed setpoints:
Internal Keypad
Code
Subcode
C728
3
C051
_
`
C728
Š
c003
_
Š
`
-199.9
`
CCW rotation:
-199.9 % ..... 0 (from C011)
CW rotation:
0 ... +199.9 % (from C011)
199.9
_
Motor speed
C051
-
Observe
• the actual speed value:
C051
• appearing messages
Diagnostics ( 25)
....
7. Save the settings with mains failure protection by entering the value "1" in code C002,
subcode 7.
30
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Commissioning
Test commissioning
3.3.2
Test commissioning with terminal control
Commissioning steps
1. Wire the power connections
Make use of the Mounting Instructions supplied with the frequency inverter to carry
out the power connections correctly and in accordance with the requirements of your
device.
2. Wire the control connections
Wiring of the analog input at X4
X4
DO1 24E DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 RFR 12I
A1U
Setpoint selection
10 V (= 100 %):
1500 rpm (for 4-pole motor)
Assignment
Terminal control
RFR
• Controller enable: RFR = high
• Error reset:
High → low (edge-controlled)
DI1
DI2
DI1: Fixed frequency 1 ... fixed frequency 3,
DI2: Fixed frequency 2 ... fixed frequency 3
see table [3-1] ( 32)
DI3
DCB
DI4
Direction of rotation counter-clockwise/clockwise
(CCW/CW)
0 ...10V
Interconnection of the digital inputs at X4
DO1 24E DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 RFR 12I
Terminal control
AR A1U GND
1kW
...
10kW
X4
Assignment
AR A1U GND
DI1 ... DI4: All active = high
3. If you are sure that the state of the frequency inverter is as delivered from the
manufacturer (Lenze setting), you can skip the following step.
If not, restore the Lenze setting on the frequency inverter:
Status
8888
Menu
Password
PASS
5 sec.
....
....
0000
_
`
Code
_
....
`
-1-
_
Š
C002
_
Action
Subcode
`
....
Š
c001
_
`
....
Š
01
_
`
....
`
-0-
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
[3-3]
Select menu -1- (all parameters)
Press "Enter" key
Set code C002
Press "Enter" key
Set subcode C001
Press "Enter" key
Set value "01"
Press "Enter" key
Setting / resetting the Lenze setting
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
31
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Commissioning
Test commissioning
4. Enable the controller:
Set terminal X4/RFR to HIGH potential (X4/12I).
5. Use the potentiometer to change the motor velocity or
the motor speed by selecting different fixed setpoints:
[3-1]
DI2
DI1
0
0
Setpoint from potentiometer
Motor speed
0
1
40 % of C011 (reference speed)
1
0
60 % of C011 (reference speed)
1
1
80 % of C011 (reference speed)
Selection of fixed motor speeds via digital input terminals
Internal Keypad
-2-
C...
_
`
C051
Code
Subcode
C051
-
Motor speed
Observe
• the actual speed value:
C051
• appearing messages
Diagnostics ( 25)
xxxx
6. Save the settings with mains failure protection by entering the value "1" in code C002,
subcode 7.
32
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Commissioning
Commissioning of the drive application with the »Engineer«
3.4
Commissioning of the drive application with the »Engineer«
The focus here is to commission a simple system constellation with a few components (see
the illustration below). During the step-by-step instructions, you will get more information
which is suitable for commissioning higher requirements.
8400 BaseLine
X6
U
V W
X4
GND AR
R
A1U
X4
RFR
12I
RFR
X61
M
3~
X6
i
• Control terminals at plug connector X4:
– GND, ground potential for analog and digital signals
– AR, reference voltage (10 V) for analog signals
– A1U, input 1 for analog signals (slider of the setpoint potentiometer R)
– RFR, controller enable (CINH)
• Parameter setting and diagnostic terminal X6:
– Communication between PC and controller
[3-4]
Block diagram for wiring the commissioning example for the drive application
 Tip!
Execute the following subchapters step by step.
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
33
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Commissioning
Commissioning of the drive application with the »Engineer«
When the device is commissioned using the »Engineer«, commissioning is carried out by
means of dialogs and graphic user interfaces.
[3-5]
3.4.1
The "Application parameter" tab as an example of a graphic user interface
Observe the safety measures
Observe all required safety measures before switching on the device. See also Before
switching on ( 21) .
34
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Commissioning
Commissioning of the drive application with the »Engineer«
3.4.2
Open the »Engineer«
When the »Engineer« is open, press the function key F1 to access the online help.

Note!
In the general part of the menu structure of the online help basic operations are
described in detail. Please refer to the following chapters and make
implementations as required:
• Chapter "Working with projects", e. g. "Creating a new project (select a
component from the catalogue)", or "Creating a new project (Start search for
connected devices)""
• Chapter "Project structure", e. g. select a motor, if possible, carry out motor
identification run
• Chapter "Device functions in the online mode", e. g. "Setting a communication
path and going online", establish connection between PC - device
1. Execute start-up wizard
Using the start-up wizard and the information contained in the online help you
first create a project in the »Engineer«
2. Establish an online connection
You establish a connection to the controller and its connected components, for
instance via a diagnostic adapter.
When an online connection has been established between PC and device, the
colour of the symbol in the project tree changes (right arrow) and "ONLINE"
appears in the lower part of the workspace (right arrow). Click the highlighted
symbol on the left:
[3-6]
Reference to the online connection in the project tree and the working area
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
35
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Commissioning
Commissioning of the drive application with the »Engineer«
3.4.3
Load the Lenze setting
In order to be able to take a defined state as a basis for this commissioning, you have to
load the Lenze setting.
Start the action with C002/1 = 1.

Note!
After the Lenze setting has been loaded, the "action ready" status is reported
with C002/1 = 0.
 Tip!
How to load the Lenze setting using the »Engineer« is described in chapter Load
Lenze setting ( 60).
3.4.4
Make motor settings
Enter the data of your motor into the field marked with the arrow if it is not a poweradapted standard motor:
36
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Commissioning
Commissioning of the drive application with the »Engineer«
3.4.5
Select control source
In this section, the origin of the signal source of the main setpoint is set. The selection of
the signal source defines how the set technology application is to be controlled. On the
"Application parameter" tab, for instance, (or with code C007) the main setpoint can be
defined as constant value via a digital input (terminal control).
The following options are available:
 Terminal control
Selection
Name
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
10
Terminal 0
JOG 1/3
JOG 2/3
DCB
CCW
12
Terminal 2
JOG 1/3
JOG 2/3
QSP
CCW
14
Terminal 11
CCW
DCB
MPotUp
MPotDown
16
Terminal 16
JOG 1/3
JOG 2/3
CwQSP
CcwQSP
 Control via keypad / PC
– Selection 20, keypad
– Selection 21, PC
 In the commissioning example, the control source "Terminals 0" (Lenze setting) is
selected (see arrow above).
Important parameters
Parameter
INFO
C007
Select control mode
C242
Operating mode, selection for PID controller
C806
Use motor potentiometer yes / no
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
37
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Commissioning
Commissioning of the drive application with the »Engineer«
The device inputs and outputs called system blocks at Lenze are the interface of the
application towards the peripherals of the controller, e.g. the digital and analog I/Os (
"LS_DigitalInput, LS_DigitalOutput, LS_AnalogInput").
This is how you can follow, for instance, the origin of the main setpoint in the »Engineer«.
Based on the "Application parameter" tab shown before, select the following path:
 Click the "Signal flow" button.
The dialog box "Overview --> Signal flow" appears (see below).
Here you find the "Analog input 1" button (see marking).
By the selection of the signal source (terminal control 0) this input is entered as source
of the main setpoint:
[3-7]
Signal sources of the TA "Speed closed-loop control", path: "Application parameters" tab --> "Signal flow" button
 Click the "Main setpoint" button. A dialog window opens which contains further details
on the origin
(terminal X4/A1U) and parameter setting (offset, C026 / gain, C027):
38
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Commissioning
Commissioning of the drive application with the »Engineer«
An overview of the inputs and outputs assigned as a function of the control source can be
found in a configuration table in the chapter Pre-assignment of the drive application
( 146).
The configuration table contains a selection for the most frequently used signals so that a
quick commissioning with only a few operator control action is possible. If the described
pre-assignment of the application block is not suitable for the drive task, select code C007
= "0" to implement an individual configuration by means of the FB editor.
This allows for easy commissioning of the application, e.g. together with the setpoint box
available in the Lenze accessories program.
3.4.6
Start program
 RFR = TRUE: Enable controller
 The setpoint potentiometer ("R", see graphics [3-4]) serves to vary the speed.
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
39
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Commissioning
Commissioning of the drive application with the »Engineer«
3.4.7
Diagnostics
Why does the motor not rotate?
If the motor does not move contrary to expectations after the last commissioning step, we
recommend the following systematic way to find out the reason for it.
1. Check the signal flow for plausible setpoints
2. Check setpoint sources
• Click the "Drive control" button (see illustration) of the "Diagnostics" tab
The appearing view is a complete summary of all control sources having an impact
on the controller:
n Control sources which set the drive to controller inhibit
o Control sources which set the drive to quick stop
p / q Diverse status information
[3-8]
Diagnostics options for drive control
 Tip!
This information can also be displayed by the internal keypad. For this call the
codes specified in the header of the table.
40
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Commissioning
Password protection
3.5
Password protection
The controller offers the option to protect the unauthorised access to the menu level by
assigning a password. The following sections describe how to create, change, or delete the
password protection and how to access the menu level via the password:
Entry of a password not available yet (delivery status)
Delete or change available password
( 42)
( 43)
Access password-protected controller without knowing the password
Reach password-protected menu level with knowing the password
( 44)
( 45)
For this proceed step by step. The graphics shown above contain a program overview and
the required steps.
The meaning of the menus and the related menu levels are described in the chapter
Menu structure ( 24).
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
41
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Commissioning
Password protection
3.5.1
Entry of a password not available yet
This information is required if you want to create the password protection for e.g. a
controller in default status.
Status
Menu
Password
Code
Action
Subcode
5s
PASS
8888
PASS
0000
_
PASS
C094
-1`
_
`
....
-0-
c007
`
_
`
_
_
C...
_
_
c...
C002
[3-9]
8888
`
`
00
`
c001
Enter password and confirm it
Action
Display
INFO
Graphics
Mains on
00
After the mains has been switched on, "00" is displayed
[3-9]
↵
-0-
Without password protection you have free access from here to all
parameters and menu levels

-1-
↵
C002

C094
Press until C094 appears
↵
00
00 is blinking, i.e. entry is possible

<8888>
Entry of a password from 01 .... 9999
↵
C094
Password confirmed
Status
Menu
Password
Code
C094
_
c007
`
_
`
_
C...
_
C002
Action
Subcode
01
`
c...
_
`
00
`
c001
[3-10] Save password with mains failure protection
42
Action
Display
INFO
Graphics

C002
Scroll down until C002 has been reached
[3-10]
↵
c001
Subcode level reached

C007
↵
00
00 is blinking
"01"
01
Enter "1", confirm with ↵ , i.e. password is saved with failure
protection
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Commissioning
Password protection
3.5.2
Delete or change available password
Status
Menu
Password
C094
-1`
_
Code
_
Subcode
Action
c007
`
_
`
_
`
8888
_
_
0.5 s
PASS
00
PASS
C...
-0-
`
c...
8888
`
0000
C002
c001
[3-11] Call available password
Action
Display
Info
Graphics
Mains on
00
↵
... PASS ....
0000
First PASS appears, then 0000

<8888>
Enter password
↵
-0-
Ready to delete or change the password

-1-
↵
C002

C094
[3-11]
Press until C094 appears
↵
<8888>
Available password is blinking

<8888>
0000
New password: Set with  or
Delete password: Set with  to "0000"
↵
C094
Password confirmed
Save
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
Save password with mains failure protection ( 42)
L
[3-10]
43
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Commissioning
Password protection
3.5.3
Access password-protected controller without knowing the password
The codes of the password-protected controller can only be accessed in a restricted way.
The accessible codes can be defined with C517.
Status
Menu
Password
Code
Subcode
Action
C517
...
`
_
8888
_
-0-
`
00
PASS
PASS
C...
_
0.5 s
`
0000
C051
[3-12] Limited parameter range without knowing the password
44
Action
Display
INFO
Mains on
00
↵
... PASS .... 0000
First PASS appears, then 0000
↵
<8888>
The password cannot be entered correctly since the password is not
known or has been entered wrongly.
Only those codes appear which have been enabled for the
"unauthorised" access.
The range of these codes can be defined in the 20 subcodes of C517.
The Lenze setting of C517 contains the following codes:
C051, C053, C054, C061, C137, C011, C039, C012, C013, C015,
C016, C022, C120, C087, C099.
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Commissioning
Password protection
3.5.4
Reach password-protected menu level with knowing the password
Status
Menu
Password
Code
Subcode
Action
...
`
_
8888
_
-0-
`
0.5 s
00
PASS
PASS
C...
_
`
0000
C002
[3-13] Reaching the menu level with knowing the password
Action
Display
Mains on
00
INFO
↵
... PASS .... 0000
First PASS appears, then 0000

<8888>
Enter password
↵
-0-
All menu levels can be accessed without any restrictions.
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
45
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Commissioning
Password protection
46
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive control (DCTRL)
4
Drive control (DCTRL)
This chapter gives information about the device function "Drive control DCTRL". This device
function serves to control the controller into defined states and retrieve status information
via the system block LS_DriveInterface:
 The device displays status information in different ways
– as optical display via front LEDs to signalise the operating status,
see chapterDiagnostics ( 25).
– as text message in the Engineer.
– as process signal at the output of the system block LS_DriveInterface
– as diagnostic parameter
 The operating states of the controller are based on the DS402 standard. Device states
( 48)
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
47
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive control (DCTRL)
Device states
4.1
Device states
The state machine controls the controller into certain states (see diagram below). The
arrows between the device states indicate the starting and end points of the possible state
changes.
The current device state can be indicated via code C137.
Power on
Init
1
0
ReadyToSwitchON
Fault
3
8
1
Warning
6
SwitchedOn
OperationEnabled
4
5
MotorIdent
2
Trouble
7
Pulse inhibit (grey field)
 Can be reached from all states.
 "Warning" contradicts the definition of a device state. In fact, it is a message which is to call attention to the
device state the warning exists for.
"Warning" can occur in parallel to other states.
[4-1]
48
Device state machine
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive control (DCTRL)
Device states
4.1.1
"Init" state
LED DRIVE READY
LED DRIVE ERROR
OFF
OFF
Display in C137
1: Initialisation active
In this state
• the controller is immediately after switching on mains power.
• the operating system is initialised.
• all device components (memory module, power section, etc.) are identified.
 The inverter is inhibited, i.e. the motor terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter are
deenergised.
 The digital and analog inputs are not yet evaluated at this time.
 The communication interfaces (e.g. diagnostic interface) are not yet working.
 The application is not yet processed.
 The monitoring functions are not yet active.
 The controller cannot be parameterised yet and no device commands can be executed.
When the power section is identified, it is checked first if it is switched on or if the required
voltage is within the tolerance zone. In case of undervoltage in the DC bus, the controller
changes to the "Trouble" or "Fault" state depending on the configuration.
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
49
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive control (DCTRL)
Device states
4.1.2
"MotorIdent" status
LED DRIVE READY
LED DRIVE ERROR
OFF
Display in C00137
MotorIdent
8400 frequency inverters are provided with a function that automatically identifies the
motor parameters, see the functional description Motor data identification .

Stop!
During motor parameter identification, the controller does not respond to
setpoint changes or control processes, (e.g. speed setpoints, QSP, torque
limitations).
The "MotorIdent" device state can only be reached by the "SwitchON" device state and
jumps back to it after the action is completed.
The following illustration shows under which conditions the state change is possible or
completed:
C0002/23 = 1
CINH = 1
&
MotorIdent
2
ReadyToSwitchON
3
[4-2]
Conditions for the state change of the motor identification
While the motor parameters are being identified,
 the application remains active
 all system interfaces (IOs, bus systems, etc.) remain active
 error monitoring remains active
 the inverter is controlled independent of the setpoint sources.
Detailed description: Automatic motor parameter identification
4.1.3
( 93)
"SafeTorqueOff" state

Danger!
This state is only possible together with a connected safety module and an
existing power section supply.
50
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive control (DCTRL)
Device states
4.1.4
"ReadyToSwitchON" state
LED DRIVE READY
LED DRIVE ERROR
Display in C00137
OFF
ReadyToSwitchON
This is the device state of the controller after the initialisation is completed!
 The bus systems are running and the terminals and encoders are evaluated.
 The monitoring modes are active.
 The controller can be parameterised.
 The application is executable.
Auto-start option C00142 = 1: Auto restart inhibited after power-up
 When the auto-start option C00142 = 1 (inhibit when "Mains on", Lenze setting) has
been selected, the controller inhibit must always be cancelled after power-up so that
the controller can change from the "Device is ready to switch on" to the "Device is
switched on":
0
Œ
1
RFR
Initialisation
Ready to switch on
Switched on
Operation
RFR

t
RFR
Initialisation
Ready to switch on
RFR
Switched on
Operation
t
 Controller pulses are inhibited
 Controller pulses are enabled
n With controller inhibit at power-up
o Without controller inhibit at power-up
[4-3]
State change when auto restart is inhibited (C00142 = "1")
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
51
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive control (DCTRL)
Device states
Auto-start option C00142 = 0: Auto restart is enabled after power-up
 The following illustration shows the state changes for the auto-start option
C00142 = 0 as a function of the controller inhibit:
0
Œ
1
RFR
Initialisation
Ready to switch on
Switched on
Operation
RFR

t
RFR
Initialisation
Ready to switch on
RFR
Switched on
Operation
t
 Controller pulses are inhibited
 Controller pulses are enabled
n With controller inhibit at power-up
o Without controller inhibit during power-up
[4-4]
State change when auto restart is enabled (C00142 = "0")
 Tip!
Code C00142 can also be used to configure that the controller inhibits the autostart function if
• there is a "Trouble" error status or
• a "Fault" error status or
• an undervoltage has been detected
52
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive control (DCTRL)
Device states
4.1.5
"SwitchedON" state
LED DRIVE READY
LED DRIVE ERROR
OFF
Display in C00137
SwitchedON
This is the drive's device state if the DC-bus voltage is applied and the controller is still
inhibited by the user (controller inhibit). The reason for the controller inhibit (CINH) is
displayed in C00158.
 The bus systems are running and the terminals and encoders are evaluated.
 The monitoring modes are active.
 The application is executable.
 When the controller is enabled, the motor generates a torque.
4.1.6
"OperationEnabled" state
LED DRIVE READY
LED DRIVE ERROR
Display in C00137
OFF
OperationEnable
In this device state, the motor follows the setpoint defined in the application.
4.1.7
Status display "Warning"
LED DRIVE READY
LED DRIVE ERROR
Display in C00137
Warning
This display may appear in parallel with all device states if a monitoring mode responds for
which the "Warning" or "Warning locked" error responses have been parameterised.
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
53
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive control (DCTRL)
Device states
4.1.8
"Trouble" state
LED DRIVE READY
LED DRIVE ERROR
OFF
Display in C00137
Trouble
This device state becomes active as soon as a monitoring mode responds for which the
"Trouble" error response has been parameterised.
 The motor has no torque (is coasting) due to the inhibit of the inverter.
 The "Trouble" device state is left automatically as soon as the error cause is eliminated.
Depending on certain conditions, the "Trouble" device state changes to another state:
54
State no.
State name
Condition(s) for the state change
11
ReadyToSwitchON
This state is accepted automatically without evaluating a
control bit
12
OperationEnabled
Control bit "ControllerInhibit" of all control channels = FALSE
& the message has been cancelled again
13
SwitchedON
Control bit "ControllerInhibit" of a control channel = TRUE
& the message has been cancelled again
14
TroubleQSP
There is an error in the system configured to "TroubleQSP"
& the message has been cancelled again
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive control (DCTRL)
Device states
4.1.9
"Fault" state
LED DRIVE READY
OFF
LED DRIVE ERROR
Display in C00137
Fault
This device state becomes active as soon as a monitoring mode responds for which the
error response "Fault" has been parameterised.
 The motor has no torque (is coasting) due to the inhibit of the inverter.
 To exit the device state, "Fail reset" must be set.
After "Fail Reset" has been executed, the state changes to "ReadyToSwitchON".

Note!
If there is an undervoltage in the DC bus (error message "LU") of the frequency
inverter, the device changes to the "Trouble" state.
An additionally occurring error with higher priority causes the drive to change to
the "Fault" state.
According to the Device state machine ( 48) the device changes to the
"ReadyToSwitchOn" state after the error has been acknowledged, although the
undervoltage is still available!
 Tip!
For more information on the error messages, see
Error messages of the operating system ( 134) or
Cause & possible remedies
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
( 138).
L
55
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive control (DCTRL)
Controller commands
4.2
Controller commands
4.2.1
General information
The commands in the subcodes of code C002 enable
 the direct control of the controller. This comprises e.g. the following subcodes:
– 16, enable controller (CINH)
"0" = controller is inhibited by software, "1" = enable via external switch
– 17, quick stop (QSP)
"0" = activate QSP via external switch, "1" = activate QSP via software
 the management of parameter sets and diagnosis services:
– Parameter set management, e.g. subcode 7, load parameter set 1
– Logbook management
– Error management
– Identification, e.g. motor parameters, inverter characteristic
Regarding the execution of the commands, there are two different groups:
1. Commands with immediate control effect (e.g. quick stop). These commands contain
the static status information ON or OFF.
2. Commands with a pure command nature
The subcodes of the second group do not execute the action immediately. However, after
the command is written, they deliver dynamic status information and thus demonstrate
the command progress:
After the activation value (1: On / start) is written, it can be read until the following state
is reported:
 "2": Busy and then > (0: Off / ready)
If a problem occurs during the execution of a device command, the returned information is
 "4": Action cancelled
or
 "5": No access
56
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive control (DCTRL)
Controller commands
Certain commands can only be executed if the controller is inhibited, e.g.
• Load Lenze setting C002/1
• Load parameter set 1, C002/7
• Identify motor parameters C002/23
If these commands are executed without the controller being inhibited, the returned
information is:
 "6": No access controller inhibit

Note!
C003 always displays the last error occurred in the form of an error number, if
e.g. a command should fail.
Status display for device command ( 59)
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
57
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive control (DCTRL)
Controller commands
The following subchapters describe the device commands in the controller in detail.
With an online connection, the controller commands can be activated from the »Engineer«
by selecting the corresponding command on the Parameters tab under C002. As an
alternative, the controller commands can be activated via the internal keypad.

Stop!
Before switching off the supply voltage after transmitting a device command via
C002, use this code to check that the device command has been completed
successfully, see C002/7 (save parameter set 1) or chapter Save parameter set
( 60). This particularly applies to device commands used for saving data in the
memory module of the device. If the saving process cannot be completed
successfully, data inconsistency can occur in the memory module.
 Tip!
Many frequently required device commands (e.g. "Save parameters") can be
executed via the toolbar icons of the »Engineer«.

Note!
Controller commands that can be executed via the toolbar of the »Engineer«
always affect the element currently selected in the Project view including all
subelements.
• If no controller, but e.g. a system module is selected in the Project view, the
corresponding device command (e.g. load parameter set ) will be activated
in all lower-level controllers having an online connection with the
»Engineer«.
For the commands described in the following subsections, the controller must
be selected in the Project view.
58
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive control (DCTRL)
Controller commands
4.2.2
Overview of device commands
Code C002
Subcode
INFO
Controller command
1 Load Lenze setting
Load Lenze setting ( 60)
2 Load parameter set 1
"Load" means:
The data is transferred from the memory
module to the device
3...6 Reserved
"Save" means:
The data is transferred from the device to the
memory module
8...10 Reserved
-
-
-
11 Save all parameter sets
All data is transferred from the device to the
memory module
12...15 Reserved
-
16 Enable controller
Set/remove controller inhibit ( 70)
-
17 Activate quick stop
Activate/deactivate quick stop function
(QSP) ( 71)
-
18 Reserved
-
19 Reset error
Reset of error message ( 136)
20 Reserved
-
21 Delete logbook
Logbook ( 129)
22 Reserved
CINH
-
23 Identify motor parameters
CINH
24 Reserved
-
25 Reserved
-
26 CAN ResetNode
CINH
27...32 Reserved
4.2.3
CINH
-
7 Save parameter set 1
[4-1]
Static/
comman
d
-
Overview of device commands, "CINH": controller must be inhibited
Status display for device command
For almost all device commands, the status is displayed via C002, e.g. whether the device
command has been executed successfully or an error has occurred during the execution. If
an error has occurred (i.e. C002 provides the value "4": Failed on readback), you can read out
the parameter 3 for detailed error diagnosis. C003 displays the status of the last executed
device command.
 The device commands which support the status display via C002 can be obtained from
the table in the previous chapter "Overview of device commands" (see column "Static /
command").
 The display under C003 remains unchanged if a device command does not support the
status display.
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
59
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive control (DCTRL)
Controller commands
4.2.4
Load Lenze setting
This controller command resets the parameter settings to the Lenze setting. All parameter
changes get lost.
 Only possible when controller is inhibited.
 This controller command has an effect on the settings of the parameters of the
operating system and application.
 How to load the Lenze setting:
1. Click the
icon to set the controller inhibit.
• A confirmation prompt is displayed asking you if the controller should really be
inhibited.
2. Confirm confirmation prompt with Yes to continue the action.
3. Execute device command C002/1 = 1: "On / Activate".
4.2.5
Save parameter set
Controller parameter changes made via the »Engineer« or internal keypad will get lost
after mains switching of the controller unless the settings have been explicitly saved with
the corresponding controller command in the memory module of the controller.
You have various opportunities to prevent a data loss by saving the parameter sets in the
memory module:
Quick saving at the push of a button
Automatic saving of parameter changes
Manual saving of parameter sets
60
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive control (DCTRL)
Controller commands
Quick saving at the push of a button
This function serves to save all available parameter sets at any time by pushing a button.
 How to proceed:
C
A
B
D
E
F
8888
SAVE
ESC
3 sec
1. Keep the entry button pressed for 3
seconds.
2. When "SAVE" is blinking, your
parameter sets are saved with
mains failure protection.
3. You can continue your work. "SAVE"
will disappear from the display after
approximately 2 seconds.
Automatic saving of parameter changes

Stop!
Activating this function is not permissible if parameters are changed very
frequently (e.g. in case of cyclic writing of parameters via a bus system).
The maximum service life of the memory module amounts to one million
writing cycles. Make sure that this value will not be reached.
When you activate the automatic saving function with code C141/1, every parameter
change is saved in the memory module. Thus, manual saving of parameter sets is not
required anymore.
Manual saving of parameter sets
This procedure serves to save either the parameter set 1 or all parameter sets via the
subcodes of code C002.
 When C002/7 = "1", the parameter set 1 is saved in the controller.
 When C002/11 = "1", all parameter sets are saved in the controller.
4.2.6
Load parameter set
Activation of this device command reloads all parameters from the memory module into
the controller. All parameter changes made since the parameter set has been saved last
will get lost.
 Only possible when the controller is inhibited
 This device command has an effect on the settings of the parameters of the operating
system, application, and module.
 How to reload the starting parameters from the memory module:
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
61
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive control (DCTRL)
Controller commands
1. Click the
symbol to inhibit the controller and stop the application currently
running.
• A confirmation prompt is displayed asking you if the controller should really be
inhibited and the application currently running should be stopped.
2. Confirm confirmation prompt with Yes to continue the action.
3. Execute device command C002 / 2 = "1", Load parameter set 1.
62
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive control (DCTRL)
System block "LS_DriveInterface"
4.3
System block "LS_DriveInterface"
The following graphic displays the functions of the LS_DriveInterface system block:
LS_DriveInterface
DriveCommands
C00002 / 16
C00002 / 17
C00002 / 19
.........
}
C00002/17
Bit 2
{
Bit1
{
QSP
Disable
C00002/16
Bit3
1
10
bInit
3
8
4
5
{
CINH
Bit14
bImpIsActive
bCInhIsActive
7
bCInh
bTrouble
bFault
FailSET
{
C00002/19
Bit7
bReady
bReadyToSwitchOn
bOperationEnable
bWarning
FailRESET
{
bCwCcw
bNactCompare
X5/28
wStateDetermFailNoLow
bFailReset
wStateDetermFailNoHigh
Status
bStatus_Bit0
PowerDisabled
bStatus_Bit2
bStatus_Bit3
bStatus_Bit4
bStatus_Bit5
bStatus_Bit14
bStatus_Bit15
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
ActSpeedIsZero
ControllerInhibit
StatusCodeBit1
StatusCodeBit2
StatusCodeBit3
StatusCodeBit4
Warning
Trouble
L
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
63
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive control (DCTRL)
System block "LS_DriveInterface"
Inputs
Identifier
Value/meaning
DIS code | data type
bCInh
Set/remove controller inhibit ( 70)
BOOL
True The controller is set to the SwitchedON state.
FALSE The controller is set to the OperationEnabled state.
bFailReset
Reset of error message ( 136)
BOOL
True The current error is reset.
FALSE The current error is not reset.
bStatus_Bit0
bStatus_Bit2
bStatus_Bit3
bStatus_Bit4
bStatus_Bit5
bStatus_Bit14
bStatus_Bit15
Freely assignable bit positions of the controller's status word.
You can use these bit positions for returning information to the higher-level control
(e.g. IPC).
BOOL
Outputs
Identifier
Value/meaning
DIS code | data type
wDeviceStatusWord
WORD
wStateDetermNoLow
Status word of the controller.
The status word contains all information required for controlling the controller. The
process data word is sent to the higher-level control via a port block.
Display of the state-determining error (low)
WORD
wStateDetermNoHigh
Display of the state-determining error (high)
WORD
*) all BOOL
True
bInit *)
State control of the controller is in state:
• Init
bSafeTorqueOff *)
State control of the controller is in state:
• SafeTorqueOff
bReady *)
State control of the controller is in state:
• Ready
bReadyToSwitchOn *)
State control of the controller is in state:
• ReadyToSwitchON
bOperationEnable *)
State control of the controller is in state:
• OperationEnable
bWarning *)
State control of the controller is in state:
• Warning
bTrouble *)
State control of the controller is in state:
• OperationEnable
bFail *)
State control of the controller is in state:
• Fault
bSystemFail *)
State control of the controller is in state:
• SystemFail
bImpIsActive
bCInhIsActive
64
State control of the controller is in state:
Pulse inhibit is active
True Controller inhibit is active
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive control (DCTRL)
System block "LS_DriveInterface"
Identifier
Value/meaning
DIS code | data type
bCwCcw
True Motor rotates in CCW direction
bNactCompare
For open-loop operation: Speed setpoint = comparison value C024
For closed-loop operation: Actual speed value = comparison value
C024
Status word output
[4-2]
[4-3]
Bit
Function
0
FreeStatusBit0
INFO
1
PowerDisabled
Inverter control is inhibited (IMP)
2
FreeStatusBit2
3
FreeStatusBit3
Function depends on the application
selected
4
FreeStatusBit4
5
FreeStatusBit5
6
ActSpeedIsZero
7
ControllerInhibit
Controller inhibit is active
8
StatusCodeBit0
Status ID (bit-coded)
9
StatusCodeBit1
10
StatusCodeBit2
11
StatusCodeBit3
12
Warning
13
Trouble
14
FreeStatusBit14
15
FreeStatusBit15
Actual speed = 0
Function depends on the application
selected
Status word of the controller
Bit
Function
0
Fail
1
M_max
2
I_max
INFO
Extended status word of the controller
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
65
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive control (DCTRL)
Parameter setting
4.4
Parameter setting
4.4.1
General information
The controller can be adapted to a specific task by means of parameters. There are different
ways to parameterise the controller:
 Internal Keypad
 Diagnostic interface
Parameter identification
Each parameter has
 a parameter number which is unique within a drive system
 a parameter text (»Engineer«)
 specific attributes
– access type (read, write)
– data type
– limit values
– Lenze setting (factory-set scaling)
Division of the parameters into groups
The parameters are divided into the following function groups:
A. Setting parameters
Parameters for setting a device function, e.g. acceleration ramp, reference speed, max.
motor current
B. Configuration parameters
Parameters for setting signal flows (signal interconnections) in the device, e.g.
connection of the main setpoint to the analog input of the controller
C. Diagnostic parameters
Parameters for displaying device-internal process variables, e.g. the actual motor
voltage or the control word. The diagnostic parameters have the attribute: read only.
66
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive control (DCTRL)
Parameter setting
Changing of parameters

Danger!
If you change configuration parameters, please observe that this causes the
device-internal signal flow to change immediately which could result in a
sudden change of setpoint sources (if, for instance, the signal source for the
main setpoint is configured).
This can lead to an undesired behaviour at the motor shaft.
Changing a parameter usually causes an immediate response of the controller.
The exceptions are certain device commands, e.g. C002/1 ("Load default setting") or
settings which might cause a critical state of the drive behaviour, e.g. a change of the
actual speed value feedback configuration for closed-loop operation of the motor control.
Such parameter changes are only accepted if the controller is inhibited, otherwise an error
message is generated.
4.4.2
Saving of the parameters in the memory module
All parameters of the drive system are saved in the integrated memory module of the
controller. This includes the parameters of the controller.
When the device is switched on, all parameters are automatically loaded from the memory
module into the main memory of the controller.
In the event of a device replacement, the entire parameter data of an axis can be retained
by "taking along" the memory module, so that additional PC or internal keypad operations
are not required.
The controller is provided with one data set for all parameters, i.e. every setting and
configuration parameter has a value.
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
67
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive control (DCTRL)
Parameter setting
4.4.3
Handling of the memory module

Danger!
If the memory module has been removed and the device is switched on, the
connector pins are live and thus dangerous since the protection against contact
is missing.

Stop!
The memory module must not be plugged in or unplugged during operation.

Note!
• Automatic saving is explicitly not supported because this significantly
reduces the service life of the memory module.
• The 8400 BaseLine memory module is not compatible with the 8400
StateLine and 8400 HighLine memory modules.
• If the memory module has been removed, the "PS01" error message appears,
see Monitoring ( 132)
In the delivery state, the Lenze setting of the parameters is stored in the memory module.
The following cases are distinguished regarding the handling:
• Delivery
– All devices are delivered with a plugged-on memory module.
– The memory module is available as a spare part - without any data.
• During operation
– The memory module (EPM) is required for operation.
– Parameter sets can be saved manually.
– Parameter sets can be loaded manually
• Replacement of the controller
If the controller has to be replaced, observe the versions of the devices. Generally, the
following applies:
– Before the data is transferred, the version is checked.
– Parameter sets of devices with V 1.0 can be processed on devices ≥ V 1.0
(downward compatibility).
– If the parameter set versions of the two devices are not compatible, an error message
(PS02/PS03, see Monitoring ( 132)) is generated.
– Parameters of a higher device version are not supported on devices with a lower
version.
68
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive control (DCTRL)
Parameter setting
4.4.4
Non-volatile saving of parameters

Note!
During the saving process
• Do not switch off the supply voltage.
• Do not pull off the memory module from the device.
To save changed parameters permanently (i.e. safe against mains failure), the device
command C002/7 must be called separately. This command copies all parameters from the
RAM of the device to the memory module.
This process may take some seconds.
The state of this saving process is indicated by the state of the corresponding device
command C002/7.
The device command C002/1 can be used to reset the controller to the Lenze setting of the
parameters (delivery state).
4.4.5
Parameter set transfer
The »Engineer« PC program can be used to
 save the parameter set to the memory module of the controller
,
 read the parameter set from the controller
 transfer the parameter set to the controller
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
.
69
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive control (DCTRL)
Parameter setting
4.4.6
Parameters for status display
Parameter
INFO
C002
Device command transmission and execution status
C003
Status of last device command
C137
Device state
C150
Status word
C155
Status word 2
C158
Cause of controller inhibit (CINH)
C159
Cause of QSP
C165/1
Status-determining error as numeric text / actual error
C166/1
Error type, status-determining / actual error
C166/2
Subject area, status-determining / actual error
C166/3
Error ID, status-determining / actual error
C168
Status-determining error (display of 32-bit number)
Highlighted in grey = display parameter
4.4.7
Set/remove controller inhibit
Setting the controller inhibit inhibits the power stages in the controller and resets the
speed/current controllers of the motor control.
 When the controller is inhibited, the status output bCInhActive of the system block
LS_DriveInterface is set to TRUE.
 The controller can be inhibited by different sources, e.g. via the digital input RFR, the
bCInh input of the LS_DriveInterface system block or the "Inhibit controller" device
command (C002/16 = "0").
 The bit code under C158 shows the source that inhibited the controller.
70
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive control (DCTRL)
Activate/deactivate quick stop function (QSP)
4.5
Activate/deactivate quick stop function (QSP)
When the quick stop function is activated, it
 disconnects the motor control from the selected setpoint and brakes the motor to
standstill (nact = 0) along the quick stop ramp (C105).
 sets the pulse inhibit (CINH) if the function auto DCB has been activated via C019.
Activation of the quick stop function
The quick stop function can be activated by different signal sources:
 Device command C002/17, activate quick stop
 Input signal at the LS_MotorInterface system block (motor control) set to TRUE.
 Tip!
The cause of a quick stop can be displayed via the parameter C159.
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
71
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive control (DCTRL)
Activate/deactivate quick stop function (QSP)
72
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
5
Motor control (MCTRL)
This chapter contains information on parameter setting of the internal motor control of
the controller, i.e. this chapter describes
 Control types and related signal flow diagrams
 Motor selection
 Parameter setting of the motor
 Optimisation of the internal control loops of the motor control.
See also:
Parameter setting of the V/f characteristic control ( 79)
Sensorless vector control (SLVC) ( 87)
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
73
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Selection of the operating mode
5.1
Selection of the operating mode
The motor control mode is defined with the selection of the operating mode, see C6:
Two different processes are available, which can be operated as follows regarding the
speed feedback:
V/f characteristic control ( 77)
– Without speed feedback, VFCplus: linear V/f characteristic (C6, value: 6)
– Without speed feedback, VFCplus: square-law V/f characteristic (C6, value: 8)
Sensorless vector control (SLVC) ( 87)
– without speed feedback, sensorless vector control (C006, value: 4)
V/f characteristic control
The V/f characteristic control is an operating mode for standard frequency inverter
applications based on a simple and robust control process. In addition to the operation of
machines with linear or square-law load torque characteristic (e.g. fan), the control process
is also suited for high-inertia systems thanks to the use of the autoboost function. Due to
the low parameterisation effort, easy and fast commissioning can be implemented for
such applications.
74
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Selection of the operating mode
Field-oriented vector control
The field-oriented vector control provides better drive properties than the V/f
characteristic control. These are in particular:
 A higher maximum torque over the whole speed range,
 a higher speed accuracy,
 a higher concentricity factor,
 a higher efficiency.
 The limitation of the maximum torque in motor and generator mode for speedactuated operation
 Tip!
If you need a high torque without feedback at low speed, we recommend the
“vector control" mode.
As shown in the following graphics, the drive systems with vector control have more
advantages than a system using V/f control.
V/f characteristic control without feedback
M
1
Vector control without feedback
0
M
1
MN
-nN
MN
nN
n
-nN
-MN
2
0
nN
n
-MN
3
2
9300vec092
3
9300vec095
 Operation in motor mode (CW rotation),  Operation in generator mode (CCW rotation),  Operation in motor
mode (CCW rotation),  Operation in generator mode (CW rotation)
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
75
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Selection of the operating mode
To ease the selection of the operating mode (C006), the following table contains
recommendations and alternatives for standard applications.
Application
Recommended
Alternatively
Linear V/f characteristic
Vector control
Single drives
With constant load
With extremely alternating loads
Vector control
Linear V/f characteristic
With high starting duty
Vector control
Linear V/f characteristic
With speed control
Linear V/f characteristic
Linear V/f characteristic
Torque limitation
Vector control
-
With torque limitation (power control)
Linear V/f characteristic
Vector control
Three-phase reluctance motor
Linear V/f characteristic
-
Three-phase sliding rotor motor
Linear V/f characteristic
-
Three-phase AC motors with permanently assigned
frequency/voltage characteristic
Linear V/f characteristic
-
Pump and fan drives with quadratic load characteristic
Square-law V/f
characteristic
Linear V/f characteristic
or vector control
Group drives (several motors connected to controller)
76
Identical motors and loads
Linear V/f characteristic
-
Different motors and/or alternating loads
Linear V/f characteristic
-
Simple hoists
Linear V/f characteristic
-
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Selection of the operating mode
5.1.1
V/f characteristic control

Stop!
• The following must be observed when operating drives with square-law V/f
characteristic:
– Please always check whether the corresponding drive is suitable for
operation with a quadratic V/f characteristic!
– If your pump or fan drive is not suitable for operation with a quadratic V/f
characteristic, either use the V/f characteristic control with linear V/f
characteristic or the vector control mode.
• For adjustment, observe the thermal performance of the connected
asynchronous motor at low output frequencies.
– Usually, standard asynchronous motors with insulation class B can be
operated for a short time with their rated current in the frequency range 0
Hz ≤ f ≤ 25 Hz.
– Contact the motor manufacturer to get the exact setting values for the
max. permissible motor current of self-ventilated motors in the lower
speed range.
– If you select the quadratic V/f characteristic, we recommend to set a lower
Vmin.
The control structure is shown, in simplified form, in the following illustration. For the
complete representation, see
Signal flow ( 108).
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
77
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Selection of the operating mode
In case of the V/f characteristic control, the motor voltage of the inverter is detected by
means of a linear or square-law characteristic depending on the field frequency or motor
speed to be generated. The voltage follows a preselected characteristic.
Uout
Uout
100 %
100 %
Umin
Umin
0
0
0
1
n
nN
0
1
n
nN
8400vec085 / 8400vec086
[5-1]
Principle of a linear and quadratic V/f characteristic
Generally, two different characteristic shapes can be defined:
 Linear V/f characteristic for drives with a constantly running and speed-independent
load torque
 Quadratic characteristic for drives with a load torque increasing quadratically with the
speed. Quadratic V/f characteristics are mainly used in centrifugal pumps and fan
drives.
78
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Selection of the operating mode
5.1.1.1
Parameter setting of the V/f characteristic control
Overview of the relevant parameters
Parameter
INFO
C006
Selection of the operating mode for V/f characteristic control without
feedback with
• value "6" for linear characteristic or
• value "8" for quadratic characteristic
C011
Reference speed
C015
Base frequency
C016
Vmin boost
C018
Switching frequency
C021
Slip compensation
C022
Current limit (in motor mode)
C023
Current limit (in generator mode)
C073
Imax current controller gain
C074
C909/1 /2
Reset time Imax current controller
Maximum positive / negative speed
C910/1 /2
Maximum positive / negative output frequency
 How to parameterise the V/f characteristic:
1. Select the operating mode " V/f characteristic control" with appropriate
characteristic shape C006.
2. When using an asynchronous motor which deviates from the standard motor,
having a different rated frequency than 50 Hz (star) / 87 Hz (delta) and a different
number of pole pairs than 2:
• Enter nameplate data of the motor (at least rated speed, rated frequency and
rated voltage)
3. If required, adapt the base frequency of the V/f characteristic C015
4. If required, rise the V/f characteristic by Vmin C016
See also:
Setting the V/f base frequency
Setting Vmin boost
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
( 80)
( 81)
L
79
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Selection of the operating mode
Setting the V/f base frequency
The V/f base frequency determines the slope of the V/f characteristic and has considerable
influence on the current, torque, and power performance of the motor.
– The setting in code C015 applies to all permissible mains voltages.
– Mains fluctuations or fluctuations of the DC-bus voltage (operation in generator
mode) do not need to be considered when the code is set. They are automatically
compensated by the internal mains voltage compensation of the device.
– Depending on the setting of C015 it may be necessary to adapt the reference speed
C011 to be able to run through the whole motor speed range.
– The V/f base frequency is automatically calculated from the data stored in the motor
nameplate by the motor parameter identification:
U FU [ V ]
C00015 [ Hz ] = -------------------------- ⋅ f Nenn [ Hz ]
U NMot [ V ]
• Vfrequency inverter:
– Frequency inverter 400 V
– Frequency inverter 230 V
• Vratedmot: Rated motor voltage depending on the
connection method
• frated: Rated motor frequency
Typical values for the V/f base frequency C015:
Frequency inverter 400 V
Motor
voltage [V]
Motor
frequency
[Hz]
Frequency inverter 230 V
Motor
connection
C015
Motor
voltage [V]
Motor
frequency
[Hz]
Motor
connection
C015
230 / 400
50

50 Hz
230
50

50 Hz
220 / 380
50

52.6 Hz
220 / 380
50

52.3 Hz
280 / 480
60

50 Hz
400 / 690
400
50
50

50 Hz
230 / 400
280 / 480
400
50
60
87

87 Hz
220 / 380
50

90.9 Hz

Note!
4-pole asynchronous motors, which are designed for a rated frequency of f = 50
Hz in star connection, can be operated in delta connection when being
constantly excited up to f = 87 Hz.
• Advantages:
– Higher speed-setting range
– 73% higher power output in case of standard motors
• Motor current and motor power increase by the factor 3 .
• The field weakening range starts above 87 Hz.
• Generally, this process can also be used with motors which have different
numbers of pole pairs. In case of 2-pole asynchronous motors, the mechanical
limit speed must be maintained.
80
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Selection of the operating mode
Setting Vmin boost
The Vmin boost C016 of the motor voltage
 serves to select a magnetising current required for asynchronous motors independent
of the load.
 is effective for output frequencies below the V/f base frequency
 optimises the torque behaviour of the motor.
The general linear and quadratic V/f characteristics are shown in the following
illustrations. The illustrations show the impacts of the parameters used to adapt the
characteristic shape.
The maximum motor voltage to be reached depends on the current mains voltage height.
V out [V]
V out [V]
1/N/PE AC 264 V
3/PE AC 550 V
V rmot
(100 %)
1/N/PE AC 264 V
3/PE AC 550 V
V rmot
(100 %)
1/N/PE AC 180 V
3/PE AC 320 V
C00016
C00016
C00016
2
C00015
2
[5-2]
1/N/PE AC 180 V
3/PE AC 320 V
C00015
f [Hz]
C00015
f [Hz]
Representation of the linear V/f characteristic (on the left) and quadratic V/f characteristic (on the right)
 How to adjust the Vmin boost:
1. Operate motor in idle state at approx. 6 % of the rated motor speed.
2. Increase Vmin until the following motor current is reached:
• Motor in short-time operation up to 0.5 nrated
with self-ventilated motors: Imotor ≈ Irated motor
with forced-ventilated motors: Imotor ≈ Irated motor
• Motor in continuous operation up to 0.5 nrated
with self-ventilated motors: Imotor ≈ 0.8 Irated motor
with forced ventilated motors: Imotor ≈ Irated motor
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
81
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Selection of the operating mode
Subsequent optimisation of the V/f characteristic control
The V/f characteristic control is generally ready for service. The options to subsequently
adapt the V/f characteristic control is to adapt the drive behaviour.
 Adaptation of the characteristic
– Each of the three characteristic shapes can be adapted to different load profiles or
motors via several parameters, see e.g. C015, base frequency or C016, Vmin boost.
 Adaptation of the drive behaviour
– Limitation of the maximum current C022 by a current controller (e.g. to prevent the
motor from stalling or to limit to the maximum permissible motor current)
– Adaptation of the field frequency by a load-dependent slip compensation C021
(improved speed accuracy for systems without feedback)
Only the following drive behaviour requires an optimisation of the V/f characteristic
control:
82
Drive behaviour
Remedy
Bad smooth running with low speeds, especially in case
of operation with long motor cable
Carry out motor identification
Problems in case of high starting duty (great mass
inertia)
Adapt Vmin boost C016
• Set the code so that a 0.8 ... 1-fold rated motor current
flows with a controller enabled and 5 ... 10% of the
rated speed.
The drive does not follow the speed setpoint.
The current controller intervenes in the set field
frequency to limit the controller output current to the
maximum current (C0022, C0023). Therefore
• increase acceleration time / deceleration time C012,
C013
• Consider a sufficient magnetising time of the motor.
Depending on the motor power the magnetising time
amounts to 0.1 ... 2 s
• increase permissible maximum current (in motor
mode, in generator mode) C022, C023
For operation with C006 = 6:
Insufficient speed constancy at high load (setpoint and
motor speed are not proportional any more)
• Increase slip compensation C021.
Important: unstable drive due to overcompensation!
• If cyclic load impulses (e.g. centrifugal pump) occur, a
smooth motor characteristic is achieved by smaller
values in C021 (possibly negative values)
Error messages "Peak current limitation clamp" (FCL),
controller cannot follow dynamic processes, i.e.
acceleration or deceleration times are too short
regarding the load conditions
• Increase the gain of the Imax controller C073
• Reduce the integral-action time of the Imax controller
C074
• Increase the acceleration time C012
• Increase the deceleration time C013
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Selection of the operating mode
5.1.1.2
Optimisation of operational performance by slip compensation

Note!
The slip compensation C021 is active in the V/f characteristic control mode and
in the vector control mode (C6 = 4, 6, 8).
Under load, the speed of an asynchronous machine decreases. This load-dependent speed
drop is called slip.
The slip can be compensated by setting C021 accordingly.
 The slip compensation can be set automatically by entering the value calculated during
the motor parameter identification into code C021.
 The setting must be made manually when the motor parameter identification cannot
be called up.
 How to enter the slip compensation automatically:
1. Prepare the motor parameter identification by setting the following data taken
from the motor nameplate:
• Rated motor power C081
• Rated motor speed C087
• Rated motor current C088
• Rated motor frequency C089
• Rated motor voltage C090
• Motor cos ϕ C091
2. Carry out the motor parameter identification
Automatic motor parameter identification ( 93)
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
83
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Selection of the operating mode
 How to set the slip compensation manually:
1. Calculate the slip compensation from the data of the motor nameplate:
s Slip constant C021 [%]
n rsyn – n r
s = ------------------------- ⋅ 100%
n rsyn
nrsyn Synchronous motor speed [rpm]
nr Rated motor speed according to the motor
nameplate [rpm]
f r ⋅ 60
n rsyn = -------------p
fr Rated motor frequency according to the
motor nameplate [Hz]
p Number of motor pole pairs (1, 2, 3 ..)
[5-1]
Calculation of the slip compensation from the motor data
2. Enter the result in code C021
3. When the drive is running, correct the code C021 until no load-dependent speed
drop occurs anymore in the speed range between idle state and maximum load of
the motor. The guide value for a correctly set slip compensation is as follows:
• Deviation from the rated motor speed ≤ 1% for the speed range of 10 % ... 100 %
of the rated motor speed and loads ≤ rated motor torque.
• Greater deviations are possible in the field weakening range
 Tip!
• If C021 is set too high, the drive may become unstable.
• Negative slip (C021 < 0) in conjunction with V/f characteristic control results in
"smoother" drive behaviour at heavy load impulses or applications requiring a
significant speed drop under load.
84
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Selection of the operating mode
5.1.1.3
Optimisation of the Imax controller setting
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
85
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Selection of the operating mode
5.1.2
Vector control

Stop!
• The connected motor may be maximum one power class lower than the
motor assigned to the controller.
• The operation with vector control is only permissible for a single drive.
• The operation with sensorless vector control (SLVC) is not permissible for
hoists.
• A stable operation is only possible if one of the following three entries are
made:
– Enter the nameplate data and equivalent circuit data of the motor (motor
leakage inductance and mutual motor inductance, slip compensation and
stator and rotor resistance) manually or
– enter the selected motor via the Lenze motor catalogue or
– enter the motor nameplate data and carry out the motor parameter
identification.
• When you enter the motor nameplate data, take into account the phase
connection implemented for the motor (star or delta connection). Only enter
the data applying to the selected connection type.
 Tip!
The complete structure of the vector control is shown in the Signal flow
86
L
( 108)
.
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Selection of the operating mode
5.1.2.1
Sensorless vector control (SLVC)
The operating mode is based on the improved motor current control according to the Lenze
FTC method.
Compared to the V/f characteristic control without feedback you will obtain
 a higher maximum torque over the whole speed range,
 a higher speed accuracy,
 a higher concentricity factor,
 a higher efficiency,
 the implementation of torque-controlled operation with speed limitation,
 the limitation of the maximum torque in motor and generator mode for speedcontrolled operation.
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
87
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Selection of the operating mode
Speed control with torque limitation
A speed setpoint is selected and the drive system is operated in a speed-controlled manner.
The operational performance can be adapted in the following ways:
 Overload limitation in the drive train:
The torque is limited via the torque setpoints. Thus, for avoiding an overload in the
drive train, nLimMotTorque C728/1 can be used to limit the torque in motor mode and
nLimGenTorque C728/2 to limit the torque in generator mode.

Note!
The codes for determining the torque limit values C728/1 for nLimMotTorque
and C728/2 for nLimGenTorque have a setting range of -199.9 % ... 0 ... +199.9 %.
To prevent sign problems or an unstable operation, the entered limit values are
processed as absolute values.
 Slip compensation:
The slip of the machine is derived by means of the slip model. The influencing
parameter is the slip compensation C021.
88
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Selection of the operating mode
Overview of the relevant parameters
Parameter
INFO
C6
Selection of the operating mode for V/f characteristic control without
feedback with
• value "6" for linear characteristic or
• value "8" for quadratic characteristic
C011
Reference speed
C018
Switching frequency
C021
Slip compensation
C022
Current limit (in motor mode)
C023
Current limit (in generator mode)
C057
Maximum torque
C081
Rated motor power
C084
Motor stator resistance
C085
Motor stator leakage inductance
C087
Rated motor speed
C088
Rated motor current
C089
Rated motor frequency
C090
Rated motor voltage
C091
Motor cosine phi
C092
Mutual motor inductance
C097
Rated motor torque
C909/1 /2
Maximum positive / negative speed
C910/1 /2
Maximum positive / negative output frequency
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
89
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Selection of the operating mode
 How to set the sensorless vector control:
1. Set code C6 to the value "4" for selecting the "sensorless vector control (SLVC)"
mode.
2. For the motor selection and parameterisation, the equivalent circuit data and the
nameplate data are required. Depending on the manufacturer of the motor used,
proceed as follows:
• Lenze motor
Select the motor from the »Engineer« catalogue [A]
Carry out the motor parameter identification [C]
• External motor
Enter the nameplate data of the motor [B] and carry out the
motor parameter identification [C]oder
directly enter nameplate data [D] and known equivalent circuit data C084, C085
, C092.
90
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Selection of the operating mode
Selection and parameter setting of the motor
A. Select the motor from the »Engineer« motor catalogue.
Continue with step [C].
• If the Lenze motor is not listed there, continue with step [B].
• If you use an external motor, continue with [B] and
• then [C] or [D]
B. Prepare the motor parameter identification by setting the following data taken from
the motor nameplate:
• Rated motor power C081
• Rated motor speed C087
• Rated motor current C088
• Rated motor frequency C089
• Rated motor voltage C090
• Motor cos ϕ C091
C. Carry out motor parameter identification C002/23
The following parameters are identified and automatically transmitted to the
corresponding codes:
• Motor leakage inductance C085
• Mutual motor inductance C092
• Stator resistance (total resistance from motor cable resistance and stator
resistance) C084
D. Enter the nameplate data and the equivalent circuit data of the external motor:
• Rated motor power C081
• Rated motor speed C087
• Rated motor current C088
• Rated motor frequency C089
• Rated motor voltage C090
• Motor cos ϕ C091
• Stator resistance C084
• Stator inductance C092
• Leakage inductance C085
The field-oriented sensorless vector control is now ready for operation.
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
91
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Selection of the operating mode
Optimisation of the sensorless vector control in case of undesired drive behaviour
Drive behaviour
Remedy
Insufficient speed constancy at high load (setpoint and
motor speed are not proportional any more)
Via C021 (slip compensation) you can affect the speed
stability under high loads:
• If nact > nslip, reduce the value in C021
• If nact < nslip, increase the value in C021
CAUTION:
An overcompensation of the settings mentioned under "
Remedy" can result in unstable behaviour!
92
Error messages "Short circuit" (OC1) or "Peak current
limitation clamp" (FLC) at short acceleration times C012
in proportion to the load (controller cannot follow the
dynamic processes).
• Increase the gain of the torque controller C073
• Reduce the integral-action time of the torque
controller C074
• Increase the acceleration time / deceleration time
C012 / C013
Speed variations in no-load operation for speeds > 1/3
rated speed
The oscillation damping minimises speed variations
C234
• Drive runs unstable
• Setpoint speed and actual speed deviate strongly
Check the equivalent circuit data of the motor and the
nameplate data.
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Selection of the operating mode
5.1.3
Automatic motor parameter identification

Danger!
During the motor parameter identification, the motor is energised via the
outputs U, V and W of the controller!
Observe the corresponding safety instructions!
The motor parameter identification serves to determine the motor data, the inverter
characteristic and the effects of the motor cable.

Note!
We strongly recommend to execute the motor parameter identification prior to
the initial commissioning of the sensorless vector control.
Overview of the relevant parameters
[5-2]
Parameter
Name
INFO
C015
V/f base frequency
Value measured during the parameter identification
or calculated value
C021
Slip compensation
Value measured during the parameter identification
or calculated value
C081
Nameplate data
C084
Stator resistance
Value measured during the parameter identification
or calculated value
C085
Leakage inductance
Value measured during the parameter identification
or calculated value
C087
Rated motor speed
Nameplate data
C088
Rated motor current
Nameplate data
C089
Rated motor current
Nameplate data
C090
Rated motor current
Nameplate data
C091
Motor cos ϕ
Nameplate data
C092
Stator inductance
Value measured during the parameter identification
or calculated value
Codes for automatic motor parameter identification
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
93
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Selection of the operating mode

Note!
• The motor parameter identification must be carried out when the motor is
cold!
• The load machine may remain connected. Holding brake, if present; may
remain in the braking position.
• With an idling motor, a small angular offset may occur at the motor shaft.
• The motor parameter identification may be aborted by unstable drive
behaviour (e.g. through a special motor or a great deviation between inverter
and motor power).
 How to carry out the automatic motor parameter identification:
1. Inhibit the controller (e.g. LOW signal at terminal X4/RFR).
Wait until the drive is at standstill.
2. Transfer the nameplate data to the following codes:
• C081, rated motor power
• C087, rated motor speed
• C088 , enter value according to the connection method ( / )
• C089 , enter value according to the connection method ( / )
• C090, enter value according to the connection method ( / )
• C091, motor cos ϕ
3. Start the motor parameter identification with the device command C002/23.
4. Enable the controller (e.g. HIGH signal at terminal X4/RFR).
The identification process starts. The progress of the identification can be read out
under C2/23.
The identification process takes about 30 s.
During this time the following steps are executed:
• The motor stator resistance C084 is measured.
• The inverter error characteristic is measured.
• The motor magnetising inductance C092 and the motor stator leakage
inductance C085 are calculated from the data entered.
• The V/f base frequency C015 is calculated.
• The slip compensation C021 is calculated.
5. The identification is completed when the value in C002/23 is back to "0".
6. Inhibit the controller (e.g. LOW signal at terminal X4/RFR).
94
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Motor selection
5.2
Motor selection
The motor data must be especially parameterised for the field-oriented control. The motor
data comprises the parameters of the motor nameplate and the data of the equivalent
circuit diagram of the motor.
Overview of the relevant parameters
[5-3]
[5-4]
Parameter
INFO
C081
Rated motor power
C087
Rated motor speed
C088
Rated motor current
C089
Rated motor frequency
C090
Rated motor voltage
C091
Motor cos ϕ
Codes of the motor nameplate
Parameter
INFO
C084
Data of the equivalent circuit diagram of the motor
C085
Data of the equivalent circuit diagram of the motor
C092
Mutual motor inductance
Codes of the equivalent circuit diagram of the motor
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
95
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Motor selection
5.2.1
Manual parameter setting of external motors
External motor data can be entered manually if you have the equivalent circuit diagram
and nameplate data available.
 Tip!
For the improvement of the concentricity factor, we recommend to carry out the
motor parameter identification of the external motor first, and then enter the data
for the manual parameterisation.
Improving the concentricity factor includes
• the adjustment of the inverter error characteristic to the drive system and
• the knowledge of the motor cable resistance.
Both factors are determined during the motor parameter identification.
Overview of the relevant parameters
[5-5]
96
Parameter
INFO
C015
V/f base frequency
C021
Slip compensation
C081
Nameplate data, rated motor power
C084
Data of the equivalent circuit diagram of the motor
C085
Data of the equivalent circuit diagram of the motor
C087
Nameplate data, rated motor speed
C088
Nameplate data, rated motor current
C089
Nameplate data, rated motor frequency
C090
Nameplate data, rated motor voltage
C091
Nameplate data, motor cos ϕ
C092
Data of the equivalent circuit diagram of the motor
Codes for the manual parameterisation of the motor data
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Selection of the switching frequency
5.3
Selection of the switching frequency

Note!
Operate the mid-frequency motors exclusively with the switching frequency
f = 8 kHzsin or f = 16 kHzsin .
The switching frequency of the inverter has an effect on the smooth running performance
and the noise generation in the motor connected, as well as on the power loss in the
controller.
The lower the switching frequency, the
 better the concentricity factor
 lower the power loss
 higher the noise generation.
Adjustable switching frequencies:
Parameter
Values
C018
1: 4 kHz var./drive-optimised
2: 8 kHz var./drive-optimised
3: 16 kHz var./driveoptimised
4: Reserved
5: 2 kHz constant/driveoptimised
6: 4 kHz constant/driveoptimised
7: 8 kHz constant/driveoptimised
8: 16 kHz constant/driveoptimised
Lowering the switching frequency due to high heatsink temperatures
If the maximally permissible heatsink temperature was exceeded, the drive would be
inhibited due to the "Overtemperature" error and the motor would coast without any
torque.
Therefore, the switching frequency in the Lenze setting is lowered to the next smaller value
when the heatsink temperature has increased to 5 ° C below the maximum permissible
temperature.
After the heatsink has cooled down, the controller automatically switches to the next
higher switching frequency up to the switching frequency set.
Lowering the switching frequency can be prevented using code C144. When the maximum
permissible heatsink temperature is reached, "Fault" is set for the respective switching
frequency and the motor coasts, see code C165.
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
97
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Selection of the switching frequency

Note!
For operation with a switching frequency of 16 kHz,
• the controller output current must not exceed the current limit values given
in the technical data. Reduce the output current using the codes C022, C023.
• the Ixt evaluation C064 is considered with the required derating to 0.67 Irated
(Irated - rated device current) at switching frequencies of 2, 4 and 8 kHz.
Lowering of the switching frequency depending on the output current
"Variable" switching frequencies can be selected for the controller in C018, where the
controller automatically lowers the switching frequency depending on the controller
output current. The changeover threshold is included in the rated data of the Hardware
Manual. (The Hardware Manual can be found on the CD supplied with the device.)
When a "fixed" switching frequency is selected, no switching frequency changeover takes
place. In case of fixed frequencies, the controller output current is limited to the
permissible value of the corresponding switching frequency. In case of larger load
impulses, the overcurrent interruption may be activated, to which the controller responds
with "Fault", see code C165.
 Tip!
The Lenze setting "8 kHzvar" ( C018, value "2") is the optimum value for standard
applications.
Limiting the maximum output frequency
The maximum output frequency of the controller is not limited depending on the
switching frequency.
For this reason, adapt the maximum output frequency according to our recommendation:
At a switching frequency of 4 kHz, for instance, 125 Hz
1
aximum output frequency ≤ ------ Switching frequenc for the maximum output frequency should not be
32
exceeded.
Carry out further measures:
 If required, deactivate the switching frequency changeover by the heatsink
temperature C144.
 If required, ensure that the changeover threshold of the controller output current to
the next smaller switching frequency will not be exceeded. If required, select a fixed
switching frequency using code C018.
Operation at an ambient temperature of 45°C
The controller is designed so that operation at an ambient temperature of 45° C without
derating is permissible at a switching frequency of 4 kHz.
98
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Definition of current and speed limits
5.4
Definition of current and speed limits
5.4.1
Definition of speed limits
Limitation of the speed setpoint
The parameter setting of code C00011 means with a speed setpoint of 100 % the drive
must rotate with the given value of the code. The speed setpoint information is given in
percent and refers to the reference speed set in C00011. For the sake of the resolution to be
achieved and the connected accuracy, the reference speed should be based on the speed
range required in the prevailing application.
Lenze recommendation: Reference speed = 1500 ... 3000 rpm.
Irrespective of the operating mode, there are more limitation options:
 Limitation of the max. positive or negative speed C909/1 or /2
 Limitation of the max. positive or negative output field frequency C910/1 or /2

Note!
In the torque-controlled operation (bTorqueModeOn = TRUE), the limitation of
the speed setpoint has no function! In this case, a permissible speed range can
be defined via the speed limitation (nSpeedHighLimit and nSpeedLowLimit).
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
99
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Definition of current and speed limits
5.4.2
Definition of current limits
The 8400 controllers are provided in the various operating modes with functions which
determine the dynamic behaviour under load and counteract the exceedance of the
maximum current in motor or generator mode.
The max. motor or generator current is limited with the codes C022 or C023.
The current limits must be selected depending on
 the permissible maximum motor current
– Recommendation: Imax < 1.5 ... 2.0 I(mot)N
 the permissible maximum inverter current
 the required motor or generator torque for the application

Note!
Highly dynamic applications
(e.g. low acceleration and deceleration ramp times or greatly fluctuating loads)
The overcurrent disconnection may respond (fault message OC1 or OC11) when
the parameterisation of the maximum current in motor mode C022
approximately corresponds to the maximum permissible value of the respective
inverter.
Remedy by
• Increase of the acceleration and deceleration ramp time,
• Reduction of the maximum current C022 / C023 in motor/generator mode
• Adaptation of the indirect peak current limitation which is implemented
depending on the type of operation (for procedure see below)
• Reduction of the reset time of the current limitation controller with C074/1.
 How to adapt the peak current limitation:
SLVC:
• Reduce slip compensation with C021.
• Reduce nTorqueMotLim C728/1 and nTorqueGenLim C728/2.
100
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Flying restart function
5.5
Flying restart function
The flying restart function works with a simple asynchronous motor model which requires
the knowledge of the stator resistance RS and the rated motor current. In order that the
flying restart function works properly, we recommend to carry out a parameter
identification before using the function. Automatic motor parameter identification
( 93)
The flying restart function works safely and reliably for drives with great centrifugal
masses.

Note!
• Do not use the flying restart function if several motors with different
centrifugal masses are connected to a controller.
• After the controller is enabled, the motor can start for a short time or reverse
when machines with low friction and low mass inertia are used.
 Tip!
• When power-adapted standard asynchronous motors are used (rated motor
power approximately corresponds to the rated inverter power), a motor
parameter identification is not required.
• In connection with the flying restart function, we recommend to read the
information given in this manual in the chapter
Automatic DC-injection braking (Auto-DCB) ( 105)
5.5.1
General information
This function serves to activate a mode which is used to "catch" a coasting motor during
operation without speed feedback. This means that the synchronicity between controller
and motor must be adjusted to achieve a jerk-free transition to the rotating machines in
the instant of connection.
The frequency inverter detects the synchronicity by identifying the synchronous field
frequency.
Duration
The "catching" process is completed after approx. 1 ... 2 seconds.
Overview of the relevant parameters
Parameter
INFO
C990
Activation of flying restart function
C991
Selection of the flying restart function
C992
Selection of the starting frequency
C994
Current injection for the flying restart process
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
101
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Flying restart function
 How to parameterise the flying restart function:
1. Activate flying restart circuit in C990 through "ON".
• Every time the controller is enabled, a synchronisation to the rotating or
standing drive is carried out.
When the Lenze setting is used, most applications do not require additional
controller settings.
If additional settings are necessary, proceed as follows:
2. Define the search mode for the flying restart circuit in C991:
• we recommend Lenze default setting "5": Last output frequency
We recommend to set a flying restart current of 10 % ... 25 % of the rated motor
current.
• During a flying restart process, a current is injected into the motor to identify
the speed.
• Reducing the current causes a reduction of the motor torque during the flying
restart process. A short-time starting action or reversing of the motor is
prevented with low flying restart currents.
• An increase of the current improves the robustness of the flying restart
function.
102
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
DC-injection braking
5.6
DC-injection braking
DC-injection braking allows the drive to be quickly braked to a standstill without the need
to use an external brake resistor.
 The braking current can be defined with code C036.
 The maximum braking torque to be generated by the DC braking current is approx.
20 ... 30 % of the rated motor torque. It is lower than that for braking in generator mode
with an external brake resistor.
 Automatic DC-injection braking (Auto-DCB) improves the starting performance of the
motor during operation without speed feedback.
Overview of the relevant parameters
Parameter
INFO
C019
Auto-DCB: threshold
Response threshold for activating the DC-injection braking
C036
DCB: Current
Enter the current in [%]
C106
Auto-DCB: hold time
C107
DCB: hold time
C701/4
See explanations for function block LA_NCtrl
DC-injection braking can be carried out in two ways with different types of activation:
Manual DC-injection braking (DCB)
( 104)
Automatic DC-injection braking (Auto-DCB)
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
( 105)
103
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
DC-injection braking
5.6.1
Manual DC-injection braking (DCB)
The DC-injection braking can be activated manually by assigning a digital input (E1 ... E4)
to the DCB function.
For HIGH-active inputs, DC-injection braking is active as long as the signal is at HIGH level.
When the hold time C107 (999.0 s = hold time has no time limit) has expired, the controller
sets the pulse inhibit (CINH).
104
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
DC-injection braking
5.6.2
Automatic DC-injection braking (Auto-DCB)
"Automatic DC-injection braking" (in the following called "Auto-DCB") can be used when
the drive has to be deenergised at n ≈ 0.
Function
For understanding the "Auto-DCB" function, it is necessary to distinguish between three
different types of operation:
1. When the drive is enabled and the speed setpoint falls below the Auto-DCB threshold
during operation, a braking current C036 is injected. When the Auto-DCB hold time
C106 has expired, the motor is deenergised via the Auto-DCB function, i.e. the
controller inhibit (CINH) is set.
2. At the moment of controller enable, the drive is at standstill (n = 0).
If the enabled drive is to start up, the speed setpoint passed via the acceleration ramp
must exceed the Auto-DCB threshold C019. Below this threshold, the motor will not be
energised.
3. At the moment of controller enable, the motor (still) rotates with a speed above the
Auto-DCB threshold and the drive is "caught".
For more detailed information on the topic see
Flying restart function ( 101).

Stop!
If the DC-injection braking operation is too long and the braking current or
braking voltage is too high, the connected motor may overheat.
 How to set the automatic DC-injection braking
1. Set the hold time in code C106 to t > 0.0 s
• Automatic DC-injection braking is active for the time set.
• A braking current is injected (code C036).
• When the hold time C106 has expired, the controller sets the pulse inhibit.
2. Set the response threshold with C019. This code can be used to set a dead band in
the setpoint. If DC-injection braking is not to be active here, C106 must be set to
the value "0.0".
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
105
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
DC-injection braking
Explanation of the automatic DC-injection braking function by means of two examples
Example 1

‚
:
Speed setpoint
:
Actual speed value of the motor
:
Controller output current
:
Pulse inhibit
:
DC-injection braking is active
ƒ
0
C00019
1
2
5
c:
The motor rotates with the selected
speed. The resulting current depends
on the load .
C00036
d:
The DC braking current set in C036 is
injected.
C0106
3
e:
When the hold time C106 has
expired, the pulse inhibit is set.
4
[5-3]
Example 1: Signal characteristic for automatic DC-injection braking
Example 2

‚
:
Speed setpoint
:
Actual speed value of the motor
:
Controller output current
:
Pulse inhibit
:
DC-injection braking is active
ƒ
0
C00019
1
2
5
c:
The motor rotates with the selected
speed. The resulting current depends
on the load .
C00036
d:
The DC braking current set in C036 is
injected.
3
e:
The actual speed value of the motor
follows the speed setpoint. The
resulting current depends on the
load.
4
^
[5-4]
106
Example 2: Signal characteristic for automatic DC-injection braking
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
DC-injection braking
5.6.3
Oscillation damping
Undesirable effects in every process are mechanical oscillations which may have an
adverse effect on the single system components and/or the production output.
Mechanical oscillations in the form of speed oscillations are suppressed by the oscillation
damping function.
Oscillation damping is successfully used with
 unloaded motors (no-load oscillations)
 motors with a different rated power than that of the controller, e.g. at operation with
high switching frequency and the related power derating.
 operation with higher-pole motors
 operation with special motors
 compensation of resonances in the drive
– Some asynchronous motors can show resonances at an output frequency of approx.
20 ... 40 Hz which cause current and speed variations and thus destabilise the
running operation.
 How to eliminate speed oscillations:
1. Approach the area where the speed oscillations occur.
2. Reduce the speed oscillations by changing C234 and C235 step by step.
3. These can be indicators for smooth running:
• Constant motor current characteristic
• Reduction of the mechanical oscillations in the bearing seat
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
107
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
Imax controller
nStatorCurrentIs
Slip compensation
nEffCurrentIq
C00021
Vp:C00073/1
TN:C00074/1
ImaxMot:C00022
ImaxGen:C00023
OutputSpeedCtrl
Motor slip model
nMotorFreqAct
C00059
fmax:C00910
nLimSpeedSetVal
nSpeedAdd
nmax:C00909
bSetQSP
0
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
1
fbase:C00015
Vmin:C00016
Selection of
characteristic
Modulator
%
Hz
V/f sqare
fMod
C00105
V/f linear
n16VoltageAdd
n16Boost
Hz
%
fbase:C00015
Vmin:C00016
1
nMotorVoltage
Signal flow - V/f characteristic control without feedback
fPWM:
C00018
PWM
C00006
0
nEffSpeedSetValue
[5-5]
Inverter
Transformation error
of coordinates characteristic
Vsoll
n16PWMAngleOffset
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Signal flow
Motor control (MCTRL)
Signal flow
108
5.7
L
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
L
Hz
%
A
Nm
Speed controller
nEffSpeedSetValue
nSpeedAdd
Torque controller
nOutputSpeedCtrl
bAutoGSBIsActive
NIAutoGSB
bLimSpeedCtrlOut
nmax:C00909
bSetQSP
0
1
nInputTorqueControl
VP:C00070/1
TN:C00071/1
bTorqueModeOn
%
0
Hz
Imax:C00022
Imax:C00023
bTorqueModeOn
VP:C00073/2
TN:C00074/2 fmax:C00910
0
0
1
A
nLimMotTorque
nLimGenTorque
nSpeedHighLimit
nSpeedLowLimit
bLimCurrentSetValue
A
nSpeedCtrllSet
bSpeedCtrll
Nm
nSpeedCtrlPAdapt
bSpeedCtrlPAdapt
TN:
C00074/2
nMotorTorqueAct
Flux model
(Calculation of slip)
C00021
Torque control with
speed limitation
Modulator
Motor voltage model
fMod
nEffCurrentIq
T_Rotor
fMod
iqset R - C00084
S
idset Ls - C00085
jU
Inverter
Transformation error
characteristic
of
coordinates
jU
Vset
Vset
C00018
PWM
Lh - C00092
nActualFluxx
Magnetization
TN:
C00074/2
TN:
C00074/1
Direct-axis current controller
Vp: C00985
nEffCurrentIq
iq
n16PWMAngleOffset
n16VoltAdd
Imr
TN:
C00074/2
nReactCurrentId
[5-6]
Sensorless vector control (speed control)
nMotorVoltage
Motor control (MCTRL)
Signal flow
109
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
nTorqueAdd
n16MotorFreqAct
Speed
limitation
1
Nm
1
nSpeedCtrllAct
TN:
C00074/2
nMotorSpeedAct
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
System block "LS_MotorInterface"
5.8
110
System block "LS_MotorInterface"
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Monitoring functions
5.9
Monitoring functions
5.9.1
Motor temperature monitoring with I²xt
The 8400 frequency inverter is provided with a simple, sensorless monitoring for thermal
"I2xt" motor overload of self-ventilated standard motors.
C066 displays the motor utilisation meter I2xt, which shows whether the motor is
overloaded or not.
The permissible overload time of the motor is reached with an overload of C066 = 100 %,
the message "Thermal motor overload, I2xt" (OC6) is output and the response set in C606
is initiated (default setting: "warning").
C120 serves to enter the overload threshold for I2xt motor monitoring

Stop!
The I2xt motor monitoring does not provide a full motor protection! Since the
motor utilisation calculated in the thermal motor model gets lost after
switching the mains, the following operating states cannot be determined
correctly:
• Restarting (after mains switching) of a motor that is already very hot.
• Change of the cooling conditions (e.g. cooling air flow interrupted or too
warm).
A full motor protection requires additional measures as e.g. the evaluation of
temperature sensors that are located directly in the winding or the use of
thermal contacts.
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
111
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Monitoring functions
Adjustment
Calculate the overload threshold I2xt:
• Ir
• IN
Ir
C00120 = ----- ⋅ 100%
IN
Rated motor current (C088)
Rated current of the controller at a switching
frequency of f = 8 kHz
 If you reduce C120 starting from the calculated value, the motor utilisation meter I2xt
(C066) will already be counted up before the rated overload threshold has been
reached.
 If you increase C120 starting from the calculated value, the motor utilisation meter I2xt
(C066) will be counted up after the rated overload threshold has been reached.
The motor utilisation meter starts to count up when the apparent motor current (C054) is
higher than the rated motor current (C088).
C00120 <
Ir x 100 %
IN
C00120 =
Ir x 100 %
IN
C00120 >
Ir x 100 %
IN
t [s]
f = 20 Hz
360
f = 0 Hz
f > 40 Hz
300
240
180
120
60
0
0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
C00054
Ir
f: output frequency
t: release time
IN: Rated controller current at a switching frequency of f = 8 kHz
Ir : rated motor current (C088)
C054: Apparent motor current
[5-7]
Tripping characteristic of I2xt monitoring
 Example: C120 = Ir /IN x 100 %
– C054 = 1.5 x rated motor current
– After approx. 60 seconds, C066 has reached the final value 100 % at output
frequencies f > 40 Hz. The controller switches off with the error "Thermal motor
overload, I2xt" (OC6) if C606 is set to "0" (trip).
112
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Monitoring functions
 Tip!
• To prevent the overload threshold of motors with forced ventilation from
being triggered too early, deactivate this function.
• The current limits C022 and C023 only have an indirect influence on the I2xt
calculation. The settings of C022 and C023, however, serve to prevent the
motor from being operated with maximum possible utilisation.
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
113
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Motor control (MCTRL)
Monitoring functions
114
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
I/O terminals
6
I/O terminals
This chapter informs about the function and the possible parameter settings of the
controller's input and output terminals.
The parameters are set in the »Engineer« on the Terminal assignment tab. Here, "analog
terminals" and "digital terminals" are distinguished in the Control connections list field:
Analog input ( 116)
Digital inputs ( 120)
Digital outputs ( 122)
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
115
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
I/O terminals
Analog input
6.1
Analog input
The controller has an analog input which serves to detect voltage signals as e.g. an analog
speed setpoint selection or the signal of an external sensor (temperature, pressure, etc.).
The following areas can be parameterised:
 0 ... 10 V, C034/1 = 0
 0 ... + 5 V, C034/1 = 1, with external load resistor (250 Ω): 0 ... 20 mA
 + 1 ... + 5 V C034/1 = 2, with external load resistor (250 Ω): 4 ... 20 mA
Moreover, current signals in the 0/+4 ... +20 mA range, ("Life Zero" including open-circuit
monitoring) can be detected via a load resistor (250 Ω) connected to the terminals.
 Further possible parameter settings of the input signals of
– offset and
– gain
 Diagnostics options:
– The monitored input can be queried with a status signal.
– Input and output values of the system block are displayed in the »Engineer« /
internal keypad.

Note!
To prevent undefined states, free input terminals of the controller must be
assigned as well, e.g. by applying 0 V (GND) to the terminal "X4/A1U".
116
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
I/O terminals
Analog input
6.1.1
Terminal assignment/electrical data
X4
GND
A1U
AR
RB
12I
RFR
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
24E
DO1
Terminal
Use
X4/A1U
Voltage input /
Current input
Electrical data
Level: • 0 ... + 10 V DC
• 0 ... + 5 V DC (0 ... + 20 mA)*)
• 1 ... + 5 V DC (+ 4 ... + 20 mA)*)
Load resistor*): RB = 250 Ω
According to the above graphics,
a load resistor must be connected
to current signals 0/+4 ... 20 mA.
Resolution: 10 Bit
(Error: 1 digit ≡ 0.1 %, related to
the actual value)
Scaling: When C034 = "0":
± 10 V ≡ ± 214 ≡ 16384 ≡ ±100 %
Conversion rate: 1 kHz
In order to filter out short-term
interferences from the analog
signal characteristic, the analog
input value is filtered with a
digital lag filter with a time
constant equal to 5 ms.
Input resistance > 80 kΩ for VDC
250 Ω for mADC
Input voltage in case Display 0 (U < 0.05 V, absolute)
of open circuit
Sampling frequency 1 kHz (1 ms)
(processing cycle)
Accuracy ± 0.1 V
Electric strength of ± 15 V, permanent
external voltage
X4/GND
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
GND, reference potential of analog signals
L
117
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
I/O terminals
Analog input
6.1.2
Parameter setting
Short overview of the parameters for the analog input:
Parameter
INFO
C010/1
Minimum analog setpoint
Minimum and maximum output speed ( 119)
C011
Maximum output speed (reference speed)
Minimum and maximum output speed ( 119)
C034
Configuration of analog input 1, evaluation of current (with external load resistor) or
voltage
C598/1
Resp. to open circuit AIN1
C026/1
Analog input 1: Offset
C027/1
Analog input 1: Gain
C028/1
Analog input 1: Voltage input signal
C029/1
Analog input 1: Current input signal
C033/1
Analog input 1: AIN1_nIn_a
Highlighted in grey = display parameter
6.1.3
Using the analog input as current input
 The current source must be connected to the X4/GND and X4/A1U plug connector.
 Code C034, selection "1" and "2", serves to reconfigure the analog input 1 to a current
input if a load resistor of 250 Ω is connected externally in parallel.
 Tip!
The selection "2" serves to implement a 4 ...20 mA current loop, e.g. for faultresistant speed setpoint selection.
Open-circuit monitoring
Use C598/1 to set an open circuit error response for the 4 ...20 mA current loop. This error
response is already activated in the Lenze setting!
118
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
I/O terminals
Analog input
Minimum and maximum output speed
The speed range required for the application is set via the selection of the output speeds:
 The maximum output speed which can be parameterised in code C011 is reached with
a speed setpoint selection of 100 %.
This value depends on the setpoint source and is considered as the reference speed for
all other settings.
 The value which can be parameterised in code C010 corresponds to the minimum
speed if
– the input of the LS_AnalogInput block is connected to the X4/A1U input terminal
(Lenze setting)
and
– a voltage of 0 V applies to the X4/A1U input terminal.
n
100 %
C011
C010
0V
[6-1]
6.1.4
10 V
Relation between setpoint and minimum and maximum output speed
System block "LS_AnalogInput"
The system block LS_AnalogInput displays the analog input in the function block editor.
X4
GND
LS_AnalogInput
C034/1
C028/1
C027/1
0
1
2
A1U
AR
A
C033/1
C026/1
nIn_a
D
bCurrentErrorIn1
Output
Value/meaning
Data type
nIn_a
C033/1 | INT
bCurrentErrorIn1
BOOL
Analog input 1
• Scaling:
± 214 ≡ ± 10 V for use as voltage input
+ 214 ≡ + 20 mA (+ 5 V) for use as current input (with external load resistor)
Status signal "Current input error"
• Only when analog input 1 is used as current input (with external load resistor).
• Application: Cable-breakage monitoring of the 4 ...20 mA circuit.
True |IAIN1| < 4 mA
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
119
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
I/O terminals
Digital inputs
6.2
Digital inputs
The four terminals DI1 ... DI4 of the plug connector X4 serve to detect digital signals.
Control input RFR serves to enable the controller and is firmly connected to the device
control.
6.2.1
Terminal assignment/electrical data
X4
GND
A1U
AR
12I
RFR
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
24E
DO1
Terminal
Use
X4/DI1
..
X4/DI4
Digital input 1 ... 4
Electrical data
LOW level: 0 ... 2.5 VDC
HIGH level: + 10 V ... + 30 V DC
Input current: 4 mA per input at 12 V DC
(X4 / 12I)
Electric strength of Max. ± 30 V, permanent
external voltage:
Input impedance: 3.3 kΩ
Processing cycle: 1 ms
6.2.2
X4/RFR
Controller enable
See digital inputs
X4/GND
Reference potential (digital ground)
Parameter setting
Short overview of parameters for the digital inputs:
Parameter
INFO
C011
Reference speed of the drive
C114
Inversion of the digital input
C701
Linking of the digital inputs with different functions of the drive application is possible.
C443/1
Status: Terminal level
• DI1 ... DI4: Bit 0 ... 3
• CINH: Bit 15
C443/2
Status: Output level
• DI1 ... DI4: Bit 0 ... 3
• CINH: Bit 15
Highlighted in grey = display parameter
120
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
I/O terminals
Digital inputs
6.2.3
System block "LS_DigitalInput"
The system block LS_DigitalInput displays the digital inputs in the function block editor.
A total of four digital inputs DigIn1 ... DigIn4 can be parameterised. For each of the
processing functions, the terminal function can be inverted with C114 The status can be
queried via code C443 at the input and output of the processing function.
X4
GND
LS_DigitalInput
A1U
AR
C443/1
12I
Bit 1
RFR
C114
0
C443/2
Bit 1
1
bCInh
DI1
C443/1
DI2
Bit 0 ... 3
DI3
C114
0
C443/2
Bit 0 ... 3
bIn1 ... bIn4
1
DI4
24E
DO1
Output
Value/meaning
DIS code | data type
bCInh
C443/1 /2 | BOOL
bIn1
...
Controller enable
Note:
In addition, there is a direct and non-configurable connection to the output stages
of the frequency inverter.
Digital input DI1
C443/1 /2 | BOOL
bln4
Digital input DI4
C443/1 /2 | BOOL
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
121
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
I/O terminals
Digital outputs
6.3
Digital outputs
The controller is provided with a parameterisable digital output and a relay output.

Note!
Initialisation behaviour:
• After mains switching up to the start of the application, the digital output
remains set to FALSE.
Exception handling:
• In case of a critical exception in the application (e.g. reset), the digital output
is set to FALSE considering the functional direction parameterised in C118.
Switching cycle diagnostics:
• Code C177/2 serves to evaluate the load of the relay by querying the
switching cycles.
6.3.1
Terminal assignment/electrical data
X4
GND
A1U
AR
12I
RFR
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
X101
NO
24E
COM
DO1
Terminal
Use
X4/DO1
Digital output 1
Electrical data
LOW level: 0 V
HIGH level: +12 ... +30 V (independent of the
voltage at X4/24E)
Output current: max. 50 mA (external resistance
> 480 Ω at 24 V)
Processing cycle: 1 ms
122
X4/24E
External voltage (24 V DC) to supply the digital output
X4/GND
Reference potential (digital ground)
X101/COM
Relay output, common contact
X101/NO
Relay output, NC contact
L
Potential-free two-way switch
AC 250 V / 3 A
DC 24 V / 2 A ... 240 V / 0.16 A (with suppressor circuit)
Important: The minimum load must not fall below 12 V
and 5 mA.
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
I/O terminals
Digital outputs
6.3.2
Parameter setting
Short overview of parameters for the digital outputs:
Parameter
Info
C118
Inversion of the output logic
C621/1
Linking the bRelay signal with the drive application
Lenze setting: LA_nCtrl_bDriveFail (50)
C621/2
Linking the bOut1 signal with the drive application
Lenze setting: LA_nCtrl_bDriveReady (51)
C177/2
Status: Switching cycles, output relay
C444/1
Status: Input level
• Bit 0: bRelay
• Bit 1: bOut1
C444/2
Status: Terminal level
• Bit 0: bRelay
• Bit 1: bOut1
Highlighted in grey = display parameter
6.3.3
Function block "LS_DigitalOutput"
In the FB editor, the function block LS_DigitalOutput is the interface to the digital output
at the front of the controller.
LS_DigitalOutput
X4
DI3
DI4
C444/1
Bit 1
bOut1
C118
0
C444/2
24E
Bit 1
DO1
1
C444/1
Bit 0
bRelay
C118
0
C444/2
Bit 0
1
X101
NO
COM
Input
Information/possible settings
DIS code | data type
bOut1
Digital output 1
C444/1 | BOOL
bRelay
Relay output, potential-free make contact
C444/1 | BOOL
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
123
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
I/O terminals
Digital outputs
124
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Error management
Basics on error handling in the controller
7
Error management
7.1
Basics on error handling in the controller
In the controller many functions are integrated which detect errors and thus
 protect the device against damage or overload, e.g. short circuit detection, Ixt overload
detection, overtemperature detection, etc.
 detect a maloperation by the user, e.g. memory module missing.
 output a warning signal if desired, e.g. if the speed is too high or too low, etc.
Depending on the importance, this error detection in the device responds very fast (e.g.
short circuit detection < 1 ms) or in a slower cycle (e.g. temperature monitoring approx.
100 ms).
Furthermore, depending on their importance, some device errors can be configured with
respect to their effect on the behaviour of the controller (e.g. for user errors which may
occur):
All functions provided with an error detection (e.g. the motor control) supply information
to an error handler which is processed every 1 ms and which evaluates all the information.
During this evaluation
 the current error is generated
 the controller is set to the respective error status (e.g. "fault").
These error data serve to diagnose errors systematically and contain the following
information:
1. the error type, e.g. warning
2. the subject area
3. the error identification number within the subject area
Together all types of information form the real error number which is unique in the whole
device system.
In addition to the control of the device state by the error handler, a logbook function
records the errors and their history. Logbook ( 129)
7.2
Drive diagnostics with the »Engineer«
 Tip!
The drive diagnostics with the integrated keypad is described in chapter
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
125
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Error management
Drive diagnostics with the »Engineer«
Diagnostics
( 25) beschrieben..
With an online connection to the controller, you can use the »Engineer« to carry out a
diagnostics for the connected controller and get a clear visualisation of important
controller states:
The online connection to the »Engineer« can be made via the diagnostic interface X6.
[7-1]
"Diagnostics" tab, screenshot for online connection to the frequency inverter
 Use the Reset error button to acknowledge an existing error message if the cause of the
error has been eliminated.
 Use the Logbook button to display the logbook of the controller. For detailed
information about the logbook, please see the chapter "Logbook" ( 129) .
 The Device state button serves to display the state machine. The current device
status is indicated by a field highlighted in blue.
 The "Monitoring" button serves to set the monitoring functions (configuration of the
error type).
 If you click the Drive control button, a table appears providing information on the bit
assignment of the following control-relevant words:
– Cause of controller inhibit C158
– Cause of quick stop C159
– Status word C150
– Extended status word C155
126
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Error management
Drive diagnostics with the »Engineer«
Display parameters
The parameters listed in the following tables serve to query current states and actual
values of the controller for diagnostic purposes, e.g. by using the internal keypad, a bus
system or the »Engineer« (with an online connection to the controller).
 These parameters are listed in the »Engineer« parameter list and the internal keypad.
 A detailed description of these parameters can be found in chapter "Parameter
reference" ( 175).
Parameter
Display
C051
Actual speed value
C052
Motor voltage
C054
Motor current
C057
Maximum torque
C059
Appl. Nominal frequency C11
C061
Heatsink temperature
C064
Device utilisation (I x t)
C066
Thermal motor load (I2xt)
C168
Status-determining error
C178
Elapsed-hour meter
C179
Power-on time meter
Identification data
The parameters listed in the following table which are entered in the »Engineer«
parameter list and in the internal keypad in the Identification  Controller category, serve
to display the identification data of the controller:
Parameter
Display
C093
Power section ID
C099,
C100
Firmware version
C200
Firmware product type
C201
Firmware compile date
 How to diagnose a drive with the »Engineer«:
1. Select the 8400 BaseLine controller to be diagnosed in the Project view.
2. Click the
icon or select the command OnlineGo online to build up an online
connection with the controller.
3. Select the Diagnostics tab.
• With an online connection, the Diagnostics tab displays current status
information about the controller.
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
127
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Error management
Drive diagnostics with the »Engineer«
128
[7-2]
Device state
[7-3]
Drive control
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Error management
Logbook
7.3
Logbook
The integrated logbook function of the controller chronologically logs important events
within the system and plays an important role for troubleshooting and controller
diagnostics.
Events that can be logged
The following events can be logged in the logbook:
 Error messages generated by the application
Information saved
For each event, the following information is saved in the logbook:
 Type of response (e.g. fault, warning ) to the event
 Subject area that activated the event (e. g. user).
 Event
 Value of power-on time meter
Memory depth
Maximum number of logbook entries: 8
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
129
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Error management
Logbook
7.3.1
Functional description
The structure of the logbook corresponds to a ring buffer:
n-1
n
n-2
• As long as free logbook memory capacity is available, the entries
will be saved at the next free memory location.
• If all memory locations are occupied, the oldest entry will be
deleted to save a new entry.
 Current event
[7-4]
Ring buffer structure
In the event of a supply voltage failure, the logbook is saved and reloaded automatically
when the controller is switched on. This ensures that the error history of the device does
not get lost. For this reason it is very important to act with caution when deleting the
logbook entries.

Note!
Events for which the response is set to "None" are not entered into the logbook.
130
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Error management
Logbook
7.3.2
Reading out logbook entries
With an online connection, the existing logbook entries can simply be displayed in the
»Engineer«. Alternatively, the logbook entries can also be read via the corresponding
parameters (e.g. using the internal keypad).
 How to display logbook entries in the »Engineer«:
1. Go to the Project view and select the 8400 BaseLine controller whose logbook
entries are to be read.
2. Click the
icon or select the command OnlineGo online to build up an online
connection with the controller.
3. Select the Diagnostics tab from the Workspace.
4. Click Logbook.
• The Logbook dialog box appears
• Click Delete to delete an entry from the logbook.
• Click Export to export the entries from the logbook into a *.log file.
5. Click Previous to close the Logbook dialog box.
[7-5]
Dialog area of the logbook
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
131
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Error management
Monitoring
7.4
Monitoring
The controller includes different monitoring functions that protect the drive against
impermissible operating conditions.
 If a monitoring function responds,
– an entry will be made into the Logbook of the controller,
– the response (troubleQSP, warning, fault, etc.) selected for the monitoring function
will be activated,
– the status of the internal device control changes according to the selected response,
controller inhibit is set, and the "DRIVE ERROR" LED on the front of the controller goes
on:
Response
Logbook
entry
Display in
C168
Pulse inhibit
Controller
inhibit
Acknowledge LED "DRV-ERR"
ment
required
None
132
OFF
Fault
;
;
;
;
Trouble
;
;
;
;
(after 0.5 s)
Warning locked
;
;
L
;
;
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Error management
Monitoring
7.4.1
Setting the error response
When a monitoring function responds, the response set for this monitoring function
(troubleQSP, warning, fault, etc.) will be activated.
 For many monitoring functions the response can be individually parameterised via
parameters.
 Tip!
The table in chapter "Short overview (A-Z)" contains the error messages for
which the response can be set ( 137) .
Warning thresholds
Some of the monitoring functions are activated if a defined warning threshold (e.g.
temperature) has been exceeded.
 The corresponding preset threshold values can be changed via the following
parameters:
7.4.2
Parameter
INFO
C120
Motor overload protection (I²xt)
C123
Device util. warning threshold
C174
Undervoltage (LU) threshold
Monitoring of the device utilisation
In C064, the device utilisation (i x t) over the last 180 seconds is displayed in [%].
 If the value displayed in C064 exceeds the warning threshold set in C123, the error
message "Device utilisation Ixt > C123" is output and the error response set in C604
occurs (default setting: "Warning").
 If the value displayed in C064 exceeds 100 %, the error message "device utilisation Ixt
> 100 %" is output and the error response "fault" occurs.
– The error can only be reset if the value displayed in C064 is < 95 % again.
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
133
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Error management
Error messages of the operating system
7.5
Error messages of the operating system
This chapter describes all error messages of the controller operating system and possible
causes & remedies.
 Tip!
The error messages are also saved in the logbook in chronological order. Logbook
( 129)
7.5.1
Error number
7.5.1.1
Structure of the error number (bit coding)
If an error occurs in the controller, the logbook saves a 32-bit value in the error format
which contains the following information:
0
1
Bit 31 30 29
2
 Reserved
3
26 25
16 15
0
 Error type
 Error subject area
 Error ID
[7-6]
7.5.1.2
Structure of the error number
Error type
Bit 31 30 29
26 25
16 15
0
The error type is dynamically assigned by the operating system.
7.5.1.3
Bit 29
Bit 28
Bit 27
Bit 26
Meaning
0
0
0
0
0: No response
0
0
0
1
1: Pulse inhibit fault
0
0
1
0
2: Trouble
0
1
0
0
4: Warning locked
Error subject area
Bit 31 30 29
26 25
16 15
0
The subject area indicates the internal "function unit" of the controller in which the error
occurred.
134
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Error management
Error messages of the operating system
7.5.1.4
Error ID
Bit 31 30 29
26 25
16 15
0
16-bit value (0 ... 65535) for error identification.
7.5.1.5
Example for bit coding of the error number
C168 displays the error number "75169803".
 This decimal value corresponds to the following bit sequence:
Bit 31 30 29
26 25
16 15
0
00000100011110110000000000001011
Assignment
Information
Meaning in the example
Reserved
Assigned with 0b00
Error type
1: Pulse inhibit fault
Subject area
123: Motor management
Error ID
16: "Short circuit" (OC1)
00
0001
0001111011
0000000000001011
 The bit-by-bit representation of the error number (divided into nibbles)
0000⏐0100⏐0111⏐1011⏐0000⏐0000⏐0000⏐1011
corresponds to the hexadecimal value of "0x47B000B"
 The error number "75169803" thus means:
In the "Motor management" subject area, an overcurrent has been detected. An "error
pulse inhibit" occurred as a response to the error which has to be acknowledged after
the error has been eliminated.
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
135
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Error management
Error messages of the operating system
7.5.2
Reset of error message
An error message with the response "Fault", "Trouble" or "Warning locked" must be
explicitly reset (acknowledged) after the cause of the error has been eliminated.
Error messages can be reset via
• the code C002/19 = "1"
• the »Engineer«
• the DCTRL input with C701/2 = "1" (terminal "X4/RFR": Low ---> High)
• Mains switching (switching off the mains and then on again)
 Tip!
With an online connection to the controller, use the Diagnostics tab of the
»Engineer« and click Error message reset to reset a pending error message.
136
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Error management
Error messages of the operating system
7.5.3
Short overview (A-Z)
The following table contains all error messages of the controller operating system in
alphabetical order with the preset error response and - if available – the parameter for
setting the error response.
 Tip!
If you click the cross-reference in the last column "Detailed information", you get
to the detailed description of the corresponding error message in the following
chapter "Cause & possible remedies" ( 138) .
[7-1]
Error message
Cross-reference / INFO
An01: AIN1_I < 4 mA
An01
df01 ... df10: Internal error
Please contact Lenze
dH69: Adjustment data error
dH69
ID1: Motor data identification error
ID1
LU: DC-bus undervoltage
LU
OC1: Power section - short circuit
OC1
OC2: Power section - earth fault
OC2
OC5: Ixt overload
OC5
OC6: I2xt motor overload
OC6
OH: Heatsink overtemperature
OH
OU: DC-bus overvoltage
OU
PS01: No memory module
PS01
PS02: Invalid parameter set
PS02
PS03: Parameter set of device invalid
PS03
PS04: Invalid parameter set
PS04
PS31: Parameter set of different power class
PS031
US01: User error 1
US01
US02: User error 2
US02
Monitoring
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
137
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Error management
Error messages of the operating system
7.5.4
Cause & possible remedies
This chapter contains all error messages of the controller operating system in numerical
order of the error number with detailed information on the response to the error message
as well as information on the cause & possible remedies.
 Tip!
A list of all error messages of the controller operating system in alphabetical order
can be found in the previous chapter
Short overview (A-Z) ( 137).
Table of the individual errors
Subject area
138
Error no.
Error cause
Error
response
Remedy by the user
No.
Name
119
Temperature
7798785
OH: Heatsink overtemperature
The heatsink temperature is higher than the
fixed limit temperature (90 ° C).
The ambient temperature of the controller may
be too high or the fan or its ventilation slots may
be dirty.
1: Error pulse inhibit
("Fault")
Check control cabinet temperature.
Clean air filter of control cabinet
Clean controller.
If required, clean or replace the fan
Provide for sufficient cooling of the
device.
119
Temperature
7798834
OC5: Ixt overload
The Ixt overload check has tripped due to
1.) wrong dimensioning of the device with
regard to its motor load or
2.) non-compliance with the load cycles
C00604
Regarding 1.) Check and, if required,
correct the dimensioning between the
device and motor load with regard to
technical data
Regarding 2.) Reduce load cycles of the
motor.
Observe load cycles according to the
documentation.
123
Motor
management /
encoder
8060942
OU: DC-bus overvoltage
The device has detected an overvoltage in the DC
bus and an earth fault on the motor side. In order
to protect the device hardware, the inverter
control is switched off.
Depending on the configuration of the autostart lock function, C00142 serves to set that, if
the this error has been tripped, the controller
only starts after the controller inhibit is
switched.
If this error message remains active longer than
the time set in C00601, a "Fault" is tripped.
2: Trouble
Reduction of the load in generator
mode.
Use of a brake resistor
Use of a regenerative power supply
module.
Layout of a DC-bus connection.
Remove earth fault on the motor side.
123
Motor
management /
encoder
8060943
LU: DC-bus undervoltage
The device has detected an undervoltage in the
DC bus. The inverter control is switched off since
the drive characteristics of the motor control
cannot be ensured anymore due to the DC-bus
undervoltage. The configuration of the autostart lock function C00142 serves to set that,
after this error has tripped, the controller only
starts after the controller inhibit is switched.
2: Trouble
Switch on the mains supply or ensure
sufficient supply via DC bus.
Adapt C00142, if required
123
Motor
management /
encoder
8060944
1: Error OC1: Power section - short circuit
pulse inhibit
The device has detected a short circuit of the
("Fault")
motor phases. In order to protect the device
electronics, the inverter control is switched off.
Mostly, faulty motor connections are the reason.
If the device is dimensioned inappropriately with
regard to the motor load and if the current
limitation in the current controller is
misadjusted (Imax controller), this error message
may occur as well.
See also the chapter Motor control - defining
current limits
L
Check of the motor connections and
the corresponding plug connector at
the device.
Compliance with the permissible
combinations of device and motor
power.
Do not set the dynamics of the current
limitation controller too high.
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Error management
Error messages of the operating system
Subject area
Error no.
Error cause
Error
response
Remedy by the user
No.
Name
123
Motor
management /
encoder
8060945
1: Error OC2: Power section - earth fault
pulse inhibit
The device has detected an earth fault of the
("Fault")
motor phases. In order to protect the device
electronics, the inverter control is switched off.
Mostly, faulty motor connections are the reason.
If the sinusoidal filters, motor cable lengths and
cable types (capacity of shielding) are
misdimensioned, discharge currents to PE may
lead to this error message.
Check of the motor connections and
the corresponding plug connector at
the device.
Use of sinusoidal filters, cable lengths
and cable types recommended by
Lenze.
123
Motor
management /
encoder
8061033
OC6: I2xt motor overload
Thermal overload of the motor
C00606
Check whether the motor overload
threshold I²xt in code C120 is
dimensioned correctly.
Compliance with load requirements
and, if required, correction of
dimensioning. With control mode
VFCplus:
Check of the Vmin boost, see C00016
For details see
Setting Vmin boost
125
Analog I/O
integrated
8192001
An01: AIN1 I < 4 mA
C00598/1
Check wiring of the analog input
terminal for open circuit.
Check minimum current values of the
signal sources.
144
Parameter set
9437185
PS01: No memory module
Memory module is not plugged in.
Either the memory module is not available or not
correctly engaged in the slot.
5: Warning
Plug in the memory module or make
sure that it is engaged correctly.
144
Parameter set
9437186
PS02: Invalid parameter set
Parameter set filing invalid due to a previously
incomplete saving of the parameter set (e.g. by
voltage failure or pulling out the memory
module during the saving process).
1: Error pulse inhibit
("Fault")
Please make sure during the saving
process that the voltage supply is kept
up and the module remains plugged
into the slot.
144
Parameter set
9437187
PS03: Parameter set of device invalid
Incompatibility of the parameter set is e.g.
caused if the parameter set in the memory
module has a higher version than the basic
device expects.
1: Error pulse inhibit
("Fault")
When exchanging the memory
modules, observe the downward
compatibility.
144
Parameter set
9437188
PS04: Invalid parameter set
A memory module incompatible for this device
has been detected.
1: Error pulse inhibit
("Fault")
If devices are exchanged, the
parameter sets of the memory module
for the device can be accepted by
means of C002/c012 = "1".
144
Parameter set
9437215
PS31: Parameter set of different power class
A parameter set of a memory module has been
detected with a different power class and motor
control SLVC (C006 = 4).
1: Error pulse inhibit
("Fault")
Execute the motor parameter
identification (C002/c023 = "1").
400
Device hardware
defective
26214505
dH69: Adjustment data error
Adjustment data error - power section
1: Error pulse inhibit
("Fault")
The device must be returned to Lenze.
980
US01: User error 1 64225281
US01: User error 1
User error 1 of LS_SetError_1
C00581/1
Defined by the user
981
US02: User error 2 64290817
US02: User error 2
User error 1 of LS_SetError_1
C00581/2
Defined by the user
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
139
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Error management
Error messages of the operating system
140
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive Application
8
Drive Application
The drive application is a drive solution provided with the experiences and know-how of
Lenze in which function blocks interconnected to a signal flow form the basis for
implementing typical drive tasks.
Brief description of the drive application features
 Configurable input signals for terminal or manual control
 Free configuration of output signals
 Offset and gain of the main setpoint
 Up to 3 fixed setpoints for speed
 Adjustable setpoint ramp times
 Linear or S-shaped ramp
 Manual jog (function depends on the device type)
 Quick stop with adjustable ramp time
 Motor potentiometer (can be switched on/off)
 Load monitoring
This chapter describes the management and details of the drive application of the 8400
BaseLine frequency inverter.
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
141
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive Application
Overview of the software structure of the drive application function
8.1
Overview of the software structure of the drive application function
C
A
B
D
E
F
8888
ESC
Parameterisation
Parameterisation
Signal
inputs
X4
Signal
outputs
X101
NO
Motion
GND
STOP
A1U
M
Setpoint
generator
COM
ç è
X4
n
DI1
DI2
24E
DO1
t
0
1
DI3
M
DI4
Drive
control
[8-1]
Motor
control
Software structure of the application function
The device comes integrated with the drive application ("actuating drive - speed"). This
drive application provides the main signal flow for implementing a general or particular
drive task in the form of a signal interconnection of diverse function blocks (application
level).
The drive application is provided with an input interface for connecting the control signal
sources (e.g. main setpoint) and an interface for controlling the device outputs.
The control signals and device outputs are connected to the drive application in the I/O
level.
Within the drive application, the main setpoint path affects the signals for the motor
control and the state control of the controller.
Both the control inputs and the control outputs and the entire drive application are
provided with parameters for
 Setting / parameter setting of internal functions
 Display of actual values
 Connection of the FBs in the I/O level
All these parameters can be addressed via the diagnostic interface. The parameters are set
e.g. via the internal keypad or diagnostics / user interfaces in the »Engineer«.
142
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive Application
Overview of the software structure of the drive application function
8.1.1
Input and output interconnection of the drive application
The input and output interconnection, the individual control signals are shown which act
on the drive application:
LA_NCtrl
LS_AnalogInput
bCurrentErrorIn1
nIn1_a
nMainSetValue_a
bMPOTInAct
bMPOTEnable
bMPOTUp
bMPOTDown
LS_ParFree_a
nPar1_a
L_MPot
nOut_a
nln_a
bEnable
bInAct
bUp
bDown
nPar2_a
nPar3_a
nPar4_a
L_NSet
bNSetInv
bRFG_0
bRfg0
bJogSpeed1
LS_ParFix
bTrue
nNOut_a
bJog1
bJogSpeed2
bJog2
nNSet_a
nPos100_a
bNSetInv
nNeg100_a
L_PCTRL
nPos199_9_a
nNSet_a
nNeg199_9_a
nPIDVpAdapt_a
nPIDActValue_a
nPIDInfluence_a
nPIDSetValue_a
bPIDInfluenceRamp
bPIDIOff
w35535
wDriveCtrl
LS_DigitalInput
nPIDVpAdapt_a
LS_DisFree_b
nNOut_a
nPIDActValue_a
VFCplus:SpeedSetValue_a
nPIDInfluence_a
nPIDSetValue_a
bPIDInfluenceRamp
bPIDIOff
LS_DisFree_a
bIn1
bIn2
SpeedSetValue_a
bIn3
nTorqueMotLim_a
nTorqueGenLim_a
bIn4
VFCplus
nTorqueMotLim_a
bHeatSinkWarning
nTorqueGenLim_a
bOVDetected
bDCBrakeOn
bCInh
bFlyingSyncActive
LS_Keypad
nMotorCurrent_a
bSetQuickstop
nOutputSpeedCtrl_a
bSetDCBrake
bSetQuickstop
bSetDCBrake
bSetDCBrake
bSetQuickstop
1
bRLQCw
nTorqueMotLim
nMotorSpeedAct_a
nMotorTorqueAct_a
nDCVoltage_a
nMotorVoltage_a
RLQ
nMotorFreqAct_a
bSetSpeedCcw
bRLQCcw
nMainSetValue
nHeatsinkTemperature_a
1
bHeatSinkWarning
bOVDetected
bDCBrakeOn
bFlyingSyncActive
nMotorCurrent_a
nOutputSpeedCtrl_a
nMotorSpeedAct_a
nMotorTorqueAct_a
nDCVoltage_a
nMotorVoltage_a
nMotorFreqAct_a
nHeatsinkTemperature_a
nDis1_a
nDis2_a
nDis3_a
nDis4_a
LS_DisFree
wDis1
wDis2
wDis3
wDis4
L_PCTRL:nNOut_a
bSetSpeedCcw
bJogSpeed1
bDis1
.
.
bDis8
bJogSpeed2
LS_DriveInterface
wCANDriveControl
bCInh
bFailReset
LS_ParFree_b
bPar1
.
.
bSetError1
bNActCompare
bSpeedCcw
bDriveReady
[8-2]
bCInh
bFailReset
wDeviceStateWord
wDeviceAuxStateWord
bDriveReady
bDriveFail
bSafeTorqueOff
bSetError1
bSafetyIsActive
bSetError2
bSetError2
bCInhActive
bStatus_Bit0
bStatus_Bit0
bSpeedCcw
bPar16
bImaxActive
bSpeedSetReached
bSpeedActEqSet
wCANDriveControl
bStatus_Bit2
bStatus_Bit3
bStatus_Bit4
bStatus_Bit5
bStatus_Bit14
bStatus_Bit15
wDeviceStateWord
wDeviceAuxStateWord
bDriveReady
bDriveFail
bSafeTorqueOff
bSafetyIsActive
bCInhActive
bSpeedCcw
bStatus_Bit2
bQSPIsActive
bStatus_Bit3
bNActCompare
bActSpeedEqZero
bQSPIsActive
bNActCompare
bStatus_Bit4
bImaxActive
bImaxActive
bStatus_Bit5
bSpeedSetReached
bSpeedSetReached
bActSpeedEqZero
LS_DigitalOutput
bRelay
bSpeedActEqSet
bSpeedActEqSet
bStatus_Bit14
wDetermFailNoLow
bStatus_Bit15
wDetermFailNoHigh
wDetermFailNoLow
wDetermFailNoHigh
Miscellaneous
bUserLED
Interconnection of the signal sources, marking: analog input 1 as main setpoint
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
143
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
Function
BaseLine D
BaseLine C
StateLine C
Connection of device I/Os
Adjustable via parameter tables
Additionally configurable via parameters or FB Editor
Signal flow generation
Predefined in the device
Some functions can be switched on and off via parameters
FB Editor, I/O level
-
HighLine C
Freely configurable
via FB Editor
Yes, editable
FB Editor, application level
Diagnostics only
Yes, editable
L
Open-loop operation
Closed-loop operation
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Speed setpoint selection via ramp function
generator with S-shaped (jerk-free) ramp
characteristic
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Number of fixed setpoints
3
3
15
15
Number of ramp times
1
1
15
15
Function for comparing the actual speed
with the digital feedback
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Reversal of CW/CCW rotation via digital
signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
Set/reset error
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Diagnostics of the digital and analog inputs
and outputs
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Configurable connection of control and
status signals
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Adjustable load monitoring
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Integrated automatic brake operation
Yes, simple speed
threshold
Yes, simple speed
threshold
Yes, simple speed
threshold
Yes, with additional
functions
Expandable by signal interconnection
Only in the I/O level
Only in the I/O level
Only in the I/O level
Yes
Blocking speeds
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Motor potentiometer function
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PID process controller
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Manual jog
No
No
Yes
Yes, two speeds
Automatic load identification and control
parameter setting
No
No
No
No
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Functions of the drive application "Actuating drive - speed"
Drive Application
Overview of the software structure of the drive application function | Functions of the drive application
144
8.1.2
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
The selection of the control type determines how the drive application of the BaseLine is to be controlled. The following types are
available:
1. Terminal control (Lenze setting)
2. Control via internal keypad / PC
The device inputs and outputs called system blocks at Lenze are the interfaces between the (internal) drive application and the
peripheral inputs and outputs of the controller. The terminals, for instance, are important inputs and outputs for the user. The
frequency inverter has one analog input and several digital inputs and outputs.
The interconnections between system blocks and the drive application are assigned with code C007. An overview of the signals
affecting the inputs and outputs of the drive application is provided by the table in chapter Pre-assignment of the drive application
( 146). Die Tabelle gibt die Verknüpfungen in der Lenze-Einstellung wieder..
L
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
145
Drive Application
Overview of the software structure of the drive application function | Functions of the drive application
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
Selection of the control type
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
Input connections
L
Code
Input
LA_NCtrl:
Code C007, value:
20 (Keypad)
21 (PC)
C700/1
nMainSetValue_a
LS_AnalogInput:nIn1_a (X4/A1U)
LS_Keypad:
nMainSetValue_a
LS_ParFree_a:nPar1_a
C700/2
nTorqueMotLm_a
LS_ParFree_a:nPar3_a
LS_Keypad:
nTorqueMotLim_a
LS_ParFree_a:nPar3_a
C700/3
nTorqueGenLm_a
LS_ParFree_a:nPar3_a
LS_Keypad:
nTorqueGenLim_a
LS_ParFree_a:nPar3_a
C700/6
nPIDVpAdapt_a
LS_ParFix:nPos100_a
C700/8
nPIDInfluence_a
LS_ParFix:nPos100_a
C701/2
bFailReset
C701/3
bSetQuickstop
C701/4
bSetDCBrake
C701/5
bSetSpeedCcw
C701/6
bJogSpeed1
LS_DigitalInput:bIn1, (X4/DI1)
C701/7
bJogSpeed2
LS_DigitalInput:bIn2, (X4/DI2)
C701/8
bMPotUp
-
-
LS_DigitalInput:bIn3
(X4/DI3)
-
-
-
C701/9
bMPotDown
-
-
LS_DigitalInput:bIn4
(X4/DI4)
-
-
-
LS_ParFix:bTrue
10 (Terminal 0)
12 (Terminal 2)
14 (Terminal 11)
16 (Terminal 16)
LS_DigitalInput:bCInh (X4/RFR)
-
LS_DigitalInput:bIn3
(X4/DI3)
LS_DigitalInput:bIn3
(X4/DI3)
-
LS_DigitalInput:bIn4
(X4/DI4)
-
-
LS_Keypad:bSetQuickstop
-
LS_DigitalInput:bIn2
(X4/DI2)
-
LS_Keypad:bSetDCBrake
LS_ParFree_b:bPar3_a
LS_DigitalInput:bIn1
(X4/DI1)
-
LS_Keypad:bSetSpeedCcw
LS_ParFree_b:bPar4_a
-
LS_DigitalInput:bIn1,
(X4/DI1)
LS_Keypad:bJogSpeed1
LS_ParFree_b:bPar1_a
-
LS_DigitalInput:bIn2,
(X4/DI2)
LS_Keypad:bJogSpeed2
LS_ParFree_b:bPar2_a
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
C701/11
bMPotEnable
-
-
C701/12
bRFG_0
-
-
C701/15
bPIDInfluenceRa
mp
C701/17
bRLQCw
LS_ParFix:bTrue
LS_ParFix:bTrue
LS_DigitalInput:
bIn3 (X4/DI3)
LS_ParFix:bTrue
C701/18
bRLQCcw
-
LS_DigitalInput:
bIn4 (X4/DI4)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
LS_ParFix:bTrue
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Pre-assignment of the drive application
Drive Application
Overview of the software structure of the drive application function | Pre-assignment of the drive
146
8.1.3
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
Code
Name
Code C007, output LA_NCtrl, value:
10 (Terminal 0)
12 (Terminal 2)
14 (Terminal 11)
16 (Terminal 16)
20 (Keypad)
21 (PC)
C620/5
LS_DisFree:
wDis1
-
-
-
-
LA_NCtrl:wDeviceStateWord
C620/9
LS_DisFree:
nDis1_a
-
-
-
-
LA_NCtrl:nMotorSpeedAct_a
C620/10
LS_DisFree:
nDis2_a
-
-
-
-
LA_NCtrl:nOutputSpeedCtrl_a
C620/20
LP_CAN-OUT1:
wState
-
-
-
-
-
-
C620/21
LP_CAN-OUT1:
wOut2
-
-
-
-
-
-
C620/22
LP_CAN-OUT1:
wOut3
-
-
-
-
-
-
C621/1
LS_DigitalOutput:
bRelay (X101)
LA_NCtrl:bDriveFail
C621/2
LS_DigitalOutput:
bOut1 (X4/DO1)
LA_NCtrl:bDriveReady
L
USER-LED
C621/8
LA_NCtrl:
bStatusBit2
LA_NCtrl:bNActCompare
LA_NCtrl:bImaxActive
C621/9
LA_NCtrl:
bStatusBit3
LA_NCtrl:bSpeedSetReached
C621/10
LA_NCtrl:
bStatusBit4
LA_NCtrl:bSpeedActEqSet
C621/11
LA_NCtrl:
bStatusBit5
LA_NCtrl:bNActCompare
C621/12
LA_NCtrl:
bStatusBit14
LA_NCtrl:bSpeedCcw
C621/13
LA_NCtrl:
bStatusBit15
LA_NCtrl:bDriveReady
C621/16
LS_DisFree:
bDis1
-
LA_NCtrl:bDriveReady
C621/17
LS_DisFree:
bDis2
-
LA_NCtrl:bDriveFail
147
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
C621/6
Drive Application
Overview of the software structure of the drive application function | Pre-assignment of the drive
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
Output connections
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive Application
Interface description of the drive application
8.2
Interface description of the drive application
LA_NCtrl
nMainSetValue_a
L_MPot
nOut_a
nln_a
bMPOTInAct
bMPOTEnable
bMPOTUp
bMPOTDown
bEnable
bInAct
bUp
bDown
L_NSet
bNSetInv
bRFG_0
bRfg0
bJogSpeed1
nNOut_a
bJog1
bJogSpeed2
bJog2
nNSet_a
bNSetInv
L_PCTRL
nNSet_a
nPIDVpAdapt_a
nPIDActValue_a
nPIDInfluence_a
nPIDSetValue_a
bPIDInfluenceRamp
bPIDIOff
nPIDVpAdapt_a
nNOut_a
nPIDActValue_a
VFCplus:SpeedSetValue_a
nPIDInfluence_a
nPIDSetValue_a
bPIDInfluenceRamp
bPIDIOff
VFCplus
SpeedSetValue_a
nTorqueMotLim_a
nTorqueGenLim_a
nTorqueMotLim_a
bHeatSinkWarning
nTorqueGenLim_a
bOVDetected
bDCBrakeOn
bFlyingSyncActive
nMotorCurrent_a
bSetQuickstop
nOutputSpeedCtrl_a
bSetDCBrake
bSetDCBrake
nMotorSpeedAct_a
nMotorTorqueAct_a
bSetQuickstop
1
bRLQCw
nDCVoltage_a
nMotorVoltage_a
RLQ
nMotorFreqAct_a
bRLQCcw
nHeatsinkTemperature_a
1
L_PCTRL:nNOut_a
bSetSpeedCcw
LS_DriveInterface
wCANDriveControl
bCInh
bFailReset
148
bCInh
wDeviceStateWord
wDeviceAuxStateWord
bDriveReady
bFailReset
bDriveFail
bSafeTorqueOff
bSetError1
bSetError2
bSetError2
bCInhActive
bStatus_Bit0
bStatus_Bit0
bSpeedCcw
bStatus_Bit14
bStatus_Bit15
[8-3]
wCANDriveControl
bSetError1
bStatus_Bit2
bStatus_Bit3
bStatus_Bit4
bStatus_Bit5
bHeatSinkWarning
bOVDetected
bDCBrakeOn
bFlyingSyncActive
nMotorCurrent_a
nOutputSpeedCtrl_a
nMotorSpeedAct_a
nMotorTorqueAct_a
nDCVoltage_a
nMotorVoltage_a
nMotorFreqAct_a
nHeatsinkTemperature_a
bSafetyIsActive
bActSpeedEqZero
bStatus_Bit2
bQSPIsActive
bStatus_Bit3
bNActCompare
wDeviceStateWord
wDeviceAuxStateWord
bDriveReady
bDriveFail
bSafeTorqueOff
bSafetyIsActive
bCInhActive
bSpeedCcw
bActSpeedEqZero
bQSPIsActive
bNActCompare
bStatus_Bit4
bImaxActive
bImaxActive
bStatus_Bit5
bSpeedSetReached
bSpeedSetReached
bSpeedActEqSet
bSpeedActEqSet
bStatus_Bit14
wDetermFailNoLow
bStatus_Bit15
wDetermFailNoHigh
wDetermFailNoLow
wDetermFailNoHigh
Drive application LA_NCtrl
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive Application
Interface description of the drive application
Inputs
Identifier/data type
Information/possible settings
bSetQuickstop
C701/3
The quick stop function is activated via this control signal. TRUE = quick stop is
active. Here, the drive ramps down the QSP ramp C0105 to speed = 0 and
• keeps the motor at n = 0 if closed loop is active
• sets pulse inhibit if Auto-DCB is activated
BOOL
bRFG_0
C701/12
When bRFG_0 = TRUE, the setpoint generator leads its currently generated speed
value to zero via the ramps parameterised.
BOOL
nTorqueMotLim_a
C700/2
INT
nTorqueGenLim_a
C700/3
INT
bSetDCBrake
C701/4
BOOL
bSetSpeedCcw
C701/5
BOOL
These input signals are directly transferred to the motor control to limit the
controller's maximum torque in motor and generator mode.
Negative values at these inputs are interpreted as "0" and have the following effects:
• Internal limitation of the torque at 199.9% (upper limit)
• The drive cannot supply a higher torque in motor mode than set herewith
100% = Mmax from C057
These input signals are directly transferred to the motor control to limit the
controller's maximum torque in motor and generator mode.
Negative values at these inputs are interpreted as "0" and have the following effects:
• Internal limitation of the torque 199.9% (lower limit)
• The drive cannot supply a higher torque in generator mode than set herewith
100% = Mmax from C057
The bSetDCBrake control signal brakes the drive to standstill.
TRUE = SetDCBrake is active.
• Braking current (C036) and hold time (C106 / C107) are adjustable
• Braking process: DC-injection braking.
Advantage of the DC-injection braking:
The DC-injection braking provides the opportunity to influence the braking time by
changing the motor current or braking torque.
The braking effect stops when the rotor is at standstill.
This control signal serves to change over the direction of rotation of the drive to CCW
rotation.
When the signal is TRUE and the main setpoint is positive, the motor shaft rotates
CCW
Main setpoint
nMainSetValue_a
C700/1
INT
bJogSpeed1
C701/6
bJogSpeed2
C701/7
BOOL
---> Fixed speeds
These control inputs serve to select fixed setpoints.
The JOG setpoints are set relatively in percent [%] of the reference speed C011. The
digital control signals bJogSpeed1 and JogSpeed2 serve to switch off the main
setpoint and activate the JOG setpoint at the same time. A total of 3 JOG setpoints
can be selected.
The coding for the enabling of the JOG values is carried out according to the
following table:
• Main setpoint:
bJogSpeed1 = 0, bJogSpeed2 =0
• JOG 1 (C039/1):
bJogSpeed1 = 1, bJogSpeed2 =0
• JOG 2 (C039/2):
bJogSpeed1 = 0, bJogSpeed2 =1
• JOG 3 (C039/3):
bJogSpeed1 = 1, bJogSpeed2 =1
Acceleration and deceleration times for the main setpoint path
The main setpoint is led via a ramp function generator. This serves to convert input
steps into a ramp.
The acceleration and deceleration times refer to a change of the speed from 0 to
nmax (0% to 100%). The calculation of the Tir (C012) and Tif (C013) times to be set is
described in the NSET function block description.
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
149
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive Application
Interface description of the drive application
Identifier/data type
Information/possible settings
bMPOTUp
C701/8
bMPOTDown
C701/9
bMPOTInAct
C701/10
bMPOTEnable
C701/11
---> Motor potentiometer function
The application is provided with an integrated motor potentiometer. This function
can be switched on/off via the parameters C701/11 or C806 = 1.
When the function is switched on, the motor potentiometer is connected to the
main setpoint path and thus acts as signal source for the main speed setpoint.
This setpoint can be ramped up and down by means of the digital control inputs
bMPOTUp and bMPOTDown via a parameterisable ramp time (C802, C803).
BOOL
bCInh
C701/1
BOOL
bFailReset
C701/2
BOOL
There are several options to inhibit the controller:
• Terminal 28 (RFG)
This signal acts fail-safe and always inhibits the controller.
FALSE : controller inhibit is active
• Control parameter C2/16.
0: controller inhibit is active
• bCinh at the control input of the application
TRUE: controller inhibit is active
As long as one of these controller inhibit sources is set, the drive remains in the
controller inhibited status.
The reason for the "controller is inhibited" status can be detected via the C0158
parameter.
When controller inhibit is set, the drive loses its torque, the machine is coasting.
When the controller inhibit request is reset, the drive synchronises to the actual
speed. For this purpose,
• an automatic flying restart function of the device is activated, if required (see
parameter C990)
• the actual speed from the motor model of the motor control is used for
synchronisation for vector control without feedback.
C701/2
A pending error can be reset by a LOW-HIGH edge (Lenze setting, linkage with
terminal X4/RFR) of this digital control signal if the cause of the fault has been
eliminated.
If the fault still exists, the error status remains unchanged.
bSetError1
C701/13
bSetError2
C701/14
BOOL
bStatus_Bit0
C621/7
bStatus_Bit2
C621/8
..
bStatus_Bit5
C621/11
bStatus_Bit14
C621/12
bStatus_Bit15
C621/13
BOOL
150
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive Application
Interface description of the drive application
Outputs
Identifier/data type
Information/possible settings
wDriveControlStatus
WORD
wCurrentFailNumber
WORD
bDriveReady
WORD
bDriveFail
BOOL
bCInhActive
bQSPIsActive
bSpeedCcw
bSpeedActCompare
bImaxActive
bSpeedSetReached,
bSpeedActEqSet
nMotorCurrent_a
nMotorSpeedSet_a,
nMotorSpeedAct_a
nMotorTorqueAct_a
nDCVoltage_a
nMotorVoltage_a
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
WORD
WORD
For detailed description see Status word output ( 65)
Application control via a bus system is possible with the 8400 BaseLine C controller.
Shows the current error numbers.
For a detailed description of the structure of error numbers see
Error number ( 134) .
Display: Drive is ready to process setpoints.
No error occurred.
An error occurred.
The error type is as follows:
• Fault
• Trouble
• WarningLocked
Display: Controller inhibit is activated
Display: Quick stop is activated
Display: Direction of motor rotation with respect to actual speed value.
WORD TRUE: Motor rotates anti-clockwise (as viewed looking onto the motor shaft)
WORD
WORD
TRUE: The actual speed value is lower than the value set in C024.
TRUE: The controller operates at the maximum current limit
• bSpeedSetReached
TRUE: Speed setpoint reached.
WORD • bSpeedSetReached
TRUE: Actual speed value has reached setpoint within one hysteresis band
WORD
Output of the current motor current
• nMotorSpeedSet_a:
resulting total speed setpoint.
WORD • nMotorSpeedAct_a:
actual speed value
WORD
WORD
WORD
Current actual torque value
Actual DC-bus voltage
Currently applied motor voltage
L
151
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Drive Application
Interface description of the drive application
152
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Function library
Function blocks
9
Function library
9.1
Function blocks
9.1.1
L_NSet
This FB is used for general signal processing of process values and is provided with the
following functions:
 Ramp function generator with linear ramps for main setpoint path
 Setting and holding the ramp function generator
 S-shaped ramp (PT1 rounding) of the ramp function generator
 Internal limitation of the input signal
 3 fixed setpoints (JOG setpoints)
L_NSet
bRfgStop
C012
C013
bRfg0
C134
C182
bNSetInv
±32767
nNSet_a
C039
/1
/2
/3
nNOut_a
1
DMUX
bJog1
bJog2
0
1
0
3
CINH
bRfgIEq0
JOG 0...3
Inputs
Identifier/data type
Information/possible settings
bRfg0
C701/12
Leading the main setpoint integrator to 0 within the current Ti times
bNSetInv
C701/5
nNSet_a
C039/12
bJog1 ... bJog2
C701/6 ... C701/7
BOOL
True The current value of the mains setpoint integrator is led to "0" via the
Ti time set.
Signal inversion for the main setpoint
BOOL
INT
True Main setpoint signal is inverted.
Main setpoint signal
• Other signals are also permitted
Selection inputs for fixed change-over setpoints (JOG setpoints) for the main
setpoint
BOOL • Selection inputs are binary coded.
Outputs
Identifier/data type
nNOut_a
bRfgIEqO
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
Value/meaning
Speed setpoint output signal
INT • 16384 ≡ 100 %
BOOL
Status signal "ramp function generator has reached setpoint"
True The ramp function generator has reached the speed setpoint.
L
153
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Function library
Function blocks
Parameter
Identifier/data type
Index
Possible settings
dnTir
DINT
C012
dnTif
DINT
C013
C39/[1...3]
C039/1..3
bSShapeActive
C134
Array of INT
INFO
0.0
s
999.9 Acceleration time - main setpoint
Initialisation: 0.0 s
0.0
s
999.9 Deceleration time Tif for the main
setpoint
• Initialisation: 0.0 s
-199.9
%
199.9 Fixed setpoints (JOG setpoints)
• Initialisation: 0.0 %
Activates S-shaped ramp function
generator characteristic for the main
setpoint
• The time constant is set using
nTiSShaped.
• Initialisation: 0 (deactivated)
BOOL
0 S-shaped ramp function generator
characteristic deactivated
1 S-shaped ramp function generator
characteristic activated
nTiSShaped
C182
9.1.1.1
INT
0.0
s
50.0 Ti time of the S-shaped ramp
function generator
• Initialisation: 20.0 s
Main setpoint path
 The signals in the main setpoint path are limited to a value range of ±32767.
 The signal at nNSet_a is first led via the JOG selection function.
 A selected JOG value switches the nNSet_a input inactive. Then, the subsequent signal
conditioning operates with the JOG value.
154
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Function library
Function blocks
9.1.1.2
JOG setpoints
JOG setpoints are constant values which are stored in the memory under C39/1 ... C39/3.
 The JOG setpoints can be called binary-coded using the bJog1 ... bJog2 selection inputs
so that 3 options are available.
 The main setpoint nNSet_a must be freely defined for bJog1 ... bJog2 = FALSE.
bJog2
bJog1
Used
Main setpoint
FALSE
FALSE
nNSet_a
FALSE
True
C39/1
True
FALSE
C39/2
True
True
C39/3
 The number of selection inputs to be assigned depends on the number of JOG setpoints
required.
9.1.1.3
Setpoint inversion
The output signal of the JOG function is led via an inverter.
The sign of the setpoint changes if bNSetInv is set to TRUE.
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
155
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Function library
Function blocks
9.1.1.4
Ramp function generator for the main setpoint
Afterwards, the setpoint is led via a ramp function generator with linear characteristic. The
ramp function generator transfers setpoint step-changes at the input to a ramp.
RFG-OUT
100 %
w2
w1
t ir
t ir
0%
Tir
t
Tir
w1, w2 = change of the main setpoint as a function of tir or tif
RFG-OUT = output of the ramp function generator
[9.1]
Acceleration and deceleration times
100 %
T ir = t ir ⋅ ---------------------w2 – w1
9.1.1.5
100 %
T if = t if ⋅ ---------------------w2 – w1
S-shaped ramp
A PT1 element is connected downstream of the linear ramp function generator. This
arrangement implements an S-shaped ramp for a nearly jerk-free acceleration and
deceleration.
 The PT1 element is switched off/on using bSShapeActive.
 The time constant is set using nTiSShaped.
156
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Function library
Function blocks
9.1.2
L_MPot
This FB replaces a hardware motor potentiometer and can be used as an alternative
setpoint source which is controlled via two inputs.
 The signal is output via a ramp function generator with linear ramps.
 The acceleration and deceleration times are set via parameters.
 The potentiometer function is selected via the Function parameter.
L_MPot
bEnable
C806
nln_a
C804
C805
bUp
bInAct
C800
C802
CTRL
0
nOut_a
1
bDown
dnActRetain
C801
C803
dnActRetain
Inputs
Identifier/data type
Information/possible settings
bEnable
C701/11
Change-over of motor potentiometer function
Input bEnable and code C806 bEnableInternal are ORed.
BOOL
True The motor potentiometer function is active, setpoint can be changed
via bUp and bDown.
• With a change-over to TRUE, the value applied to nIn_a is
automatically transferred to the motor potentiometer.
FALSE The value applied to nIn_a is output at nOut_a.
nIn_a
C700/1
bUp
C701/8
bDown
C701/9
bInAct
C701/10
When bEnable = FALSE, the analog input signal nIn_ is switched to the nOut_a
output.
INT
Increase output signal
BOOL
True The nOut_a output signal runs to its upper limit value (nHighLimit).
• If the bDown input is simultaneously set to TRUE, the nOut_a
output signal is not changed.
Reduce output signal
BOOL
True The nOut_a output signal runs to its lower limit value (nLowLimit).
• If the bUp input is simultaneously set to TRUE, the nOut_a output
signal is not changed.
Deactivate motor potentiometer function
• This input has the highest priority.
BOOL • When the motor potentiometer is deactivated, the nOut_a output signal follows
the function set with Function.
True Motor potentiometer function is deactivated.
Outputs
Identifier/data type
nOut_a
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
Value/meaning
INT
Output signal
L
157
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Function library
Function blocks
Parameter
Identifier/data type
Index
dnActRetain
nHighLimit
C800
nLowLimit
C801
wTir
C802
wTif
C803
Function
C804
Possible settings
INFO
Saves the current setpoint
DINT
-199.9
%
199.9 Upper limit
• Initialisation: 100.0 %
-199.9
%
199.9 Lower limit
• Initialisation: -100.0 %
INT
INT
1
0.1 s
6000 Acceleration time - main setpoint
(Tir)
• 10 ≡ 1 s
• Initialisation: 10 s
1
0.1 s
6000 Deceleration time Tif
• 10 ≡ 1 s
• Initialisation: 10 s
WORD
WORD
BYTE
Function selection
• Initialisation: 0
0 No further action; nOut_a retains its
value.
1 The motor potentiometer returns to
0 % with the deceleration time Tif.
2 The motor potentiometer runs to
the lower limit value with the
deceleration time Tif (nLowLimit)
3 The motor potentiometer output
immediately changes to 0 %
Important for the emergency stop
function
4 The motor potentiometer output
immediately changes to the lower
limit value (nLowLimit)
5 The motor potentiometer runs to
the upper limit value with the
acceleration time Tir (nHighLimit)
byInitFunction
C805
BYTE
Behaviour after mains power-up
• Initialisation: 0
0 The output value being output
during mains power-up, is saved
non-volatilely in the internal
memory of the controller. It will be
reloaded during mains power-up.
1 The lower limit (nLowLimit) is loaded
during mains power-up.
2 An output value = 0 % is loaded
during mains power-up.
158
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Function library
Function blocks
9.1.2.1
Activation & control of motor potentiometer
When bInAct is set to FALSE, the motor potentiometer is activated.
 The currently active function depends on the current output signal nOut_a, the limit
values set and the control signals at bUp and bDown.
 When the nOut_a output signal is outside the limits set, the output signal runs to the
next limit with the Ti times set. This process is independent of the control signals at
bUp and bDown.
 When the nOut_a output signal is inside the limits set, the output signal changes
according to the control signals at bUp and bDown.
nOut_a
nHighLimit
wTir
wTif
wTir
0
t
wTir
nLowLimit
bUp
TRUE
FALSE
t
bDown
TRUE
FALSE
t
[9.2]
Example: Control of the motor potentiometer
bUp
bDown
bInact
Function
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
The nOut_a output signal remains unchanged.
FALSE
True
The nOut_a output signal runs to its upper limit value (nHighLimit).
True
FALSE
The nOut_a output signal runs to its lower limit value (nLowLimit).
True
True
The nOut_a output signal remains unchanged.
-
-
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
True
The motor potentiometer function is deactivated. The nOut_a
output signal responds according to the function selected via
Function.
L
159
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Function library
Function blocks
9.1.2.2
Deactivation of motor potentiometer
When the motor potentiometer is deactivated by setting bInAct to TRUE, the nOut_a
output signal responds according to the function selected via Function.
nOut_a
nHighLimit
wTif
0
1
wTir
wTif
nLowLimit
wTif
wTir
0
t
bUp
TRUE
FALSE
t
bDown
TRUE
FALSE
t
bInAct
TRUE
FALSE
t
 When the motor potentiometer is deactivated, nOut_a is reduced to 0 % with the deceleration time wTif.
 If it is activated again, nOut_a is increased again to nLowLimit with the acceleration time wTir.
[9.3]
9.1.2.3
Example: Deactivation of the motor potentiometer when the function 1, C804 = 1, has been selected
Save current output value after mains failure
To save the last actual value at nOut_a after a mains failure, declare a RETAIN variable and
combine this with the FB instance as shown in the following illustration:
L_MPot
bEnable
C806
nln_a
C804
C805
bUp
bInAct
C800
C802
CTRL
0
nOut_a
1
bDown
VAR RETAIN
dnActRetain
C801
C803
dnActRetain
VAR RETAIN
 This variable always saves the current value at nOut_a. Even in case of mains failure the
variable keeps the value.
 When the mains is switched on again, the value saved in the variable is read into the FB
L_MPOT and processed as starting value.
160
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Function library
Function blocks
9.1.3
L_PCTRL
This function extension is available from software version 3.0!
This FB is a PID controller and can be used for various control tasks (e.g. as dancer position
controller, tension controller, or pressure controller).
 Available function blocks: 1
The FB is provides with the following functions:
 Adjustable control algorithm (P, PI, PID)
 Ramp function generator for preventing setpoint step-changes at the input
 Limitation of the controller output
 Factorisation of the output signal
Vp adaptation
 Integral action component can be switched off
L_PCTRL
C00242
0
1
2
3
nNSet_a
nSet_a
nAdapt_a
Vp C00222
Tn C00223
Kd C00224
C00225
C00227
0
1
2
3
C00245
0
1
2
3
C00226
nOut_a
C00228
1
nAct_a
bIOff
bActEqSet
C00243
bInAct
nInfluence_a
bEnableInfluenceRamp
C00244
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
161
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Function library
Function blocks
Inputs
Identifier/data type
nNSet_a
Information/possible settings
INT
Speed setpoint
nAdapt_a
Reduction of the gain (nVp) by the value applied (in %)
INT • Internal limitation to ±32767
• Changes can be done online.
Example:
When nVp = 2.0 and nVpadapt = 75 % ((75/100) x 16384 = 12288), the gain factor
results in: 2.0 x 12288 = 24576
nSet_a
Sensor setpoint (process setpoint) in the operating mode nMode = 1 and 3
INT • Internal limitation to ± 199.9 %
Process setpoint in operating mode nMode = 2
• Internal limitation to ± 199.9 %
nAct_a
Speed or actual sensor value (actual process value)
INT • Internal limitation to ± 199.9 %
bInAct
Deactivate process controller temporarily
BOOL • Changes can be done online.
Note: This input is not connected with the application NCTRL.
True Process controller is deactivated, the internal PID-component is
switched off.
bIOff
Switch off the I-component of the process controller
BOOL • Changes can be done online.
True I-component of the process controller is switched off
nInfluence_a
nEnableInfluenceRamp
• Internal limitation to ±32767
INT • nInfluence_a serves to limit the influencing factor of the PID controller contained
in the FB to a required value (- 199.9 % ... + 199.9 %).
True Influencing factor of the PID controller is ramped up to the nInflu_a
value.
INT
FALSE Influencing factor of the PID controller is ramped down to "0".
Outputs
Identifier/data type
nOut_a
bActEqSet
Value/meaning
Output signal
INT • 16384 ≡ 100 %
INT
Active: Setpoint and actual value are identical, no system deviation available
Parameter
Identifier/data type
Index
Vp
C00222
Tn
Kd
C00224
162
Possible settings
INT
INT
INT
Info
0.1
0.1
20
ms
0
0.1
L
500 Gain Vp
• Initialisation: 1.0
6000 Reset time Tn
• Initialisation: 400 ms
5 Differential component Kd
• Initialisation: 0.0
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Function library
Function blocks
Identifier/data type
Index
MaxLimit
C00225
MinLimit
C00226
Acceleration time
C00227
Deceleration time
C00228
Possible settings
DINT
DINT
DINT
DINT
Info
-199.99
%
+199.99 Maximum value of the PID operating
range
• Initialisation: 199.99 %
-199.99
%
+199.99 Minimum value of the PID operating
range
• Initialisation: -199.99 %
0.000
s
999.999 Acceleration time for the ramp at the
PID output (should be set as steep as
possible)
• Initialisation: 0.010 s
0.000
s
999.999 Deceleration time for the ramp at the
PID output
• Initialisation: 0.010 s
Operating mode
C00242
Value range of the output signal
• Initialisation: 0
0 Off
The setpoint applied to the input
nNSet_a is output without any
changes at the output nOut_a.
1 Additive + feedforward control
The setpoint is picked off at the input
nNSet_a. Simultaneously, the
setpoint is added to the output value
of the PID-component and then
output at nOut_a.
2 PID as a setpoint generator
The setpoint is picked off at the input
nSet_a. The input nNSet_a is not
used. There is no additive linking at
the output.
3 PID setpoint from L_NSet_1
The setpoint is picked off at the input
nNSet_a. The input nSet_a is not
used. There is no additive linking at
the output.
Influence acceleration time
C00243
0.000
s
999.999 Acceleration time Tir for the
influence value
• Initialisation: 5 s
Influence deceleration time
C00244
0.000
s
999.999 Deceleration time Tif for the
influence value
• Initialisation: 5 s
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
163
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Function library
Function blocks
9.1.3.1
Control characteristic
The PID algorithm is active in the Lenze setting.
Differential component Kd
The Kd component can be deactivated by setting nKd = 0.0. This makes the controller a PI
controller (or P controller if the integral action component is switched off as well).
Integral action component
You can switch off the I-component by
 setting bIOff to TRUE or
 entering Tn = 6000 s (max. value).
The I-component can be switched on and off online.
Reset time Tn
nTn serves to parameterise the reset time.
Gain Vp
 The Vp gain is defined via nAdapt_a:
Vp
nVp
0
[9.4]
100 %
nAdapt_a
Definition of Vp gain via nAdapt_a
 The input value is led via a linear characteristic. The slope of the characteristic is defined
with nVp (upper limit) and the value "0" (lower limit). The value in nVp applies if the
input value is +100 % (100 % = 16384)
164
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Function library
Function blocks
9.1.3.2
Ramp function generator
The PID output is led via a ramp function generator with linear characteristic. This serves
to transfer setpoint step-changes at the PID output into a ramp which should be as steep
as possible.
RFG-OUT
100 %
w2
w1
t ir
t if
0%
Tir
t
T if
w1, w2 = change of the main setpoint as a function of tir and tif
RFG-OUT = output of the ramp function generator
[9.5]
Acceleration and deceleration times
 tir and tif are the desired times for changing between w1 and w2.
 The ramps for acceleration and deceleration can be set individually.
– Acceleration time tir with C00227
– Deceleration time tif with C00228
 The tir/tif values are converted into the required Ti times according to the following
formula:
100 %
T ir = t ir ⋅ ---------------------w2 – w1
100 %
T if = t if ⋅ ---------------------w2 – w1
 The ramp function generator is immediately set to "0" by setting bInAct to TRUE.
9.1.3.3
Value range of the output signal
 The output signal and thus the operating range of the PID-component can be limited
with the parameters nMaxLimit and nMinLmit (- 199.9%...+ 199.9%)
9.1.3.4
Evaluation of the output signal
 The limitation is followed by an evaluation of the output signal via nInfluence_a.
 This evaluation is activated or suppressed along a ramp via the input
bEnableInfluenceRamp. The ramp times are set with the parameters "Influence
acceleration time" and "Influence deceleration time" (C00243 / C00244).
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
165
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Function library
Function blocks
9.1.3.5
Deactivation of the process controller
 bInAct = TRUE deactivates the process controller. This serves to
– set the PID output = 0,
– set the integral action component = 0,
– set the ramp function generator = 0.
A setpoint executed in mode 1 of the input nNSet_a, however, will still be output.
166
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Function library
Function blocks
9.1.4
L_RLQ
This FB combines the selection of a direction of rotation with the QSP function with wire
break protection.
 Available function blocks: 1
L_RLQ
bCwCCw
bCw
bCcW
1S
Q
1R
Q
bQSP
Inputs
Identifier/data type
Information/possible settings
bCw
Input
BOOL • TRUE = CW rotation
bCCw
Input
BOOL • TRUE = CCW rotation
Outputs
Identifier/data type
bQSP
Value/meaning
Output signal for QSP (quick stop)
BOOL
bCwCcw
Output signal for CW/CCW rotation
BOOL • TRUE = CCW rotation
Function
Inputs
[9.6]
Outputs
Info
bCw
bCcw
bCwCcw
bQSP
True
True
FALSE
True
Only if both inputs are applied with a TRUE signal at the moment of
switch-on, the outputs have these state!
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
True
If only one of the inputs has the TRUE status, this part of the truth
table applies
True
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
True
True
FALSE
True
True
*) no change of the original status.
*)
Truth table of the FB L_RLQ, 0 = FALSE, 1 = TRUE
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
167
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Function library
Function blocks
9.1.5
LS_DisFree
This FB serves to display any 16-bit process signal on display codes.
LS_DisFree
wDis01
wDis02
wDis03
wDis04
C481/1
C481/2
C481/3
C481/4
Inputs
Identifier/data type
Information/possible settings
wDis01 ... wDis04
C620/5 ... 8
Input
WORD
Parameter
168
Identifier/data type
Index
Possible settings
C481/1 ... 4
0x0000
INFO
0xFFFF General 16-bit signal
• Read only
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Function library
Function blocks
9.1.6
LS_DisFree_a
This FB serves to display four percentage analog process signals on display codes.
LS_DisFree_a
nDis01
nDis02
nDis03
nDis04
C482/1
C482/2
C482/3
C482/4
Inputs
Identifier/data type
Information/possible settings
nDis01_a ... nDis04_a
C620/9 ... 12
Input
INT
Parameter
Identifier/data type
Index
Possible settings
C482/1 ... 4
- 199.9 %
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
INFO
+ 199.9 % Process signal
• Read only
L
169
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Function library
Function blocks
9.1.7
LS_DisFree_b
This FB serves to display eight boolean process signals on a bit-standardised display code.
LS_DisFree_b
bDis01
bDis02
bDis03
bDis04
bDis05
bDis06
bDis07
bDis08
C480 Bit 0
C480 Bit 1
C480 Bit 2
C480 Bit 3
C480 Bit 4
C480 Bit 5
C480 Bit 6
C480 Bit 7
Inputs
Identifier/data type
Information/possible settings
bDis01 ... nDis08
C621/16 ... 23
Input
BOOL
Parameter
170
Identifier/data type
Index
Possible settings
C480/1 ... 8
0
INFO
1 Process signal
• Read only
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Function library
Function blocks
9.1.8
LS_ParFix
This system block provides the user with fixed values which can be used in the
interconnection for parameterisation purposes.
LS_ParFix
bTrue
nPos100_a
nNeg100_a
nPos199_99_a
nPos199_99_a
w65535
Outputs
The output values are fixed and can therefore not be parameterised.
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
171
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Function library
Function blocks
9.1.9
LS_ParFree_b
This system block provides 16 digital signals which can be parameterised separately by the
user.
LS_ParFree_b
bPar01_a
bPar02_a
bPar03_a
bPar04_a
bPar05_a
bPar06_a
bPar07_a
bPar08_a
bPar09_a
bPar10_a
bPar11_a
bPar12_a
bPar13_a
bPar14_a
bPar15_a
bPar16_a
Outputs
Identifier/data type
bPar01 ... bPar16
Information/possible settings
BOOL
Output
Parameter
172
Identifier/data type
Index
Possible settings
INFO
C470/1 ... 16
0
"FALSE" signal is output
1
"TRUE" signal is output
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Function library
Function blocks
9.1.10
LS_ParFree_a
This system block provides 4 analog signal which can be parameterised separately by the
user.
LS_ParFree_a
nPar1_a
nPar2_a
nPar3_a
nPar4_a
Outputs
Identifier/data type
nPar1_a ... nPar4_a
Information/possible settings
INT
Output
Parameter
Identifier/data type
Index
Possible settings
C472/1 ... 4
-199.9
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
INFO
%
L
+199.9
173
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Function library
Function blocks
174
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
10
Parameter reference
All parameters for controller parameter setting and monitoring are called "codes".
 The codes are numbered and indicated by the prefix "C" before the code, e.g. "C00002".
 For the sake of clarity, some codes contain "subcodes" for saving parameters. This
Manual uses a slash "/" as a separator between code and subcode, e.g. C00118/3".
 The terms "code" and "subcode" generally correspond to the terms "index" and
"subindex" and "parameter" and "subparameter".
 In case of the 8400 frequency inverter, the following functions can be carried out via
codes:
– Setting of setpoints, e.g. acceleration time.
– Display of actual values, e.g. actual motor current.
– Configuration of signal links, e.g. assignment of the digital input terminals to control
inputs of the technology application.
– Configuration of monitoring functions, e.g. selection of the error response and
setting of trigger thresholds.
Parameters which are only available in the controller from a certain software version
onwards, are marked with a corresponding note in the parameter description ("from
version xx.xx.xx").
The parameter descriptions are based on the software version V03.00.00
 Tip!
For quick reference of a parameter with a certain name, simply use the index of the
online documentation. The index always contains the corresponding code in
parentheses after the name.
For general information on how to read and change parameters, please see the
online documentation for the »Engineer«.
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
175
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Structure of the parameter descriptions
10.1
Structure of the parameter descriptions
Each parameter is described in the Parameter list in the form of a table which consists of
the following three areas:
Table header
The table header contains the following general information:
 Parameter number (Cxxxxx)
 Parameter name (display text in »Engineer» and keypad)
 Data type
 Parameter index in decimal and hexadecimal notation for access via a fieldbus, e.g.
system bus (CAN).
 Tip!
The parameter index is calculated as follows:
• Index [dec] = 24575 - code
• Index [hex] = 0x5FFF - code
Example for code C00005:
• Index [dec] = 24575 - 5 = 24570
• Index [hex] = 0x5FFF - 0x{5} = 0x5FFA
Table contents
The table contains further general explanations & notes on the parameter and the possible
settings the representation of which depends on the parameter type:
 Parameters with read-only access
 Parameters with write access
Table footer
The table footer contains the Parameter attributes.
176
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Structure of the parameter descriptions
10.1.1
Data type
The following data types are available for parameters:
10.1.2
Data type
Meaning
INTEGER_8
8-bit value with sign
INTEGER_16
16-bit value with sign
INTEGER_32
32-bit value with sign
INTEGER_64
64-bit value with sign
UNSIGNED_8
8-bit value without sign
UNSIGNED_16
16-bit value without sign
UNSIGNED_32
32-bit value without sign
UNSIGNED_64
64-bit value without sign
FLOATING_POINT
32-bit floating point number
VISIBLE_STRING
String of digits from printable digits
OCTET_STRING
String of digits from any digits
BITFIELD_8
8-bit value, bit-coded
BITFIELD_16
16-bit value, bit-coded
BITFIELD_32
32-bit value, bit-coded
Parameters with read-only access
Parameters for which the "write access" attribute has not been set can only be read and not
be changed by the user.
Description structure
Parameter | Name:
Data type: _______
Index: _______
Cxxxxx | _____________
Description
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
Scaling factor: 1
Representation in the »Engineer«
The »Engineer« displays these parameters with a grey background or, with an online
connection, with a pale-yellow background:
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
177
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Structure of the parameter descriptions
10.1.3
Parameters with write access
Only parameters with a check mark (;) in front of the "write access" attribute can be
changed by the user. The Lenze setting for these parameters is printed in bold.
 The settings are either selected by means of a selection list or through direct value
entry.
 Values outside the valid setting range are represented in red in the »Engineer«.
10.1.3.1
Parameters with setting range
Description structure
Parameter | Name:
Data type: _______
Index: _______
Cxxxxx | _____________
Description
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
Lenze setting
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter setting in the »Engineer«
In the »Engineer«, parameters are set by entering the desired value into the input field:
10.1.3.2
Parameters with selection list
Description structure
Parameter | Name:
Data type: _______
Index: _______
Cxxxxx | _____________
Description
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
1
2
3
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
178
L
Scaling factor: 1
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Structure of the parameter descriptions
Parameter setting in the »Engineer«
In the »Engineer«, a list field is used for parameter setting:
10.1.3.3
Parameters with bit-coded setting
Description structure
Parameter | Name:
Data type: _______
Index: _______
Cxxxxx | _____________
Description
Value is bit-coded:
Bit 0
...
Bit 31
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter setting in the »Engineer«
The »Engineer« uses a dialog box for parameter setting in which the individual bits can be
set or reset. Alternatively, the value can be entered as a decimal or hexadecimal value:
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
179
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Structure of the parameter descriptions
10.1.3.4
Parameters with subcodes
Description structure
Parameter | Name:
Data type: _______
Index: _______
Cxxxxx | _____________
Description
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
Subcodes
Lenze setting
Cxxxxx/1
Cxxxxx/2
Cxxxxx/3
Cxxxxx/4
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter setting in the »Engineer«
The »Engineer« parameter list displays each subcode individually. They are parameterised
as described in the previous chapters.
10.1.4
Parameter attributes
The table footers contain the parameter attributes:
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
180
Attribute
Meaning
; Read access
Read access to parameter possible.
; Write access
Write access to parameter possible.
• Please also observe the following attributes:
Scaling factor: 1
; CINH
Parameter value can only be changed when the controller is
inhibited.
; PLC STOP
Parameter value can only be changed when the application is
stopped.
; No transfer
Parameter is not transferred to controller when the command Download parameter set is
executed.
; COM
Communication-relevant parameter
• this parameter is relevant for parameter data transfer via the system bus (CAN)
; MOT
Parameter of the motor control
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Structure of the parameter descriptions
Scaling factor
The "scaling factor" is important for parameter access via a bus system.
Signal type
Analog (scaled)
Angular velocity
Position in [units]
Digital (BOOL)
Time
Selection value
Scaling factor
Resolution
Value range
100
16 bits signed
± 199.99 %
1
16 bits signed
± 32767 increments/ms
10000
32 bits signed
± 214748.3647 [units]
1
8 bits unsigned
1000
16 bits unsigned
0 ... 999.000 s
1
16 bits unsigned
0...65535
0 ≡ FALSE; 1 ≡ TRUE
Example 1: The value "654" read via a bus system of the parameter C00028/1 (AIN1: input
voltage) must be divided by the corresponding scaling factor "100" to obtain the real
display value "6.54 V".
Read value (via bus system)
----------------------------------------------------------------------- = Indicated value (Engineer)
Scaling factor
[10-1] Conversion formula for read access via bus system
Example 2: In order to set the parameter C00012 (acceleration time - main setpoint) to the
value "123.45 %" via a bus system, the integer value "12345" must be transferred, i.e. the
value to be set must be multiplied by the corresponding scaling factor "100".
Value to be written (via bus system) = Value to be set ⋅ Scaling factor
[10-2] Conversion formula for write access via bus system
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
181
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list
10.2
Parameter list
This chapter describes all parameters of the operating system in numerically ascending
order.

Note!
The parameter descriptions are based on the software version V03.00.00.
C00002
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 24573d = 5FFDh
C00002 | Controller commands
Note:
Before switching off the supply voltage after executing a device command, check the successful execution of the
device command by means of the status display in C00003!
Drive control (DCTRL): Device commands
Selection list
0 Off / ready
1 On / start
2 Working
4 Action cancelled
5 No access
6 No access controller inhibit
182
Subcodes
Lenze setting
Info
C00002/1
0: Off / ready
Load Lenze setting
• All parameters are reset to the Lenze setting.
• Only possible when controller is inhibited.
C00002/2
0: Off / ready
Load parameter set 1
C00002/3
0: Off / ready
Reserved
C00002/4
0: Off / ready
Reserved
C00002/5
0: Off / ready
Reserved
C00002/6
0: Off / ready
Reserved
C00002/7
0: Off / ready
Save parameter set 1
C00002/8
0: Off / ready
Reserved
C00002/9
0: Off / ready
Reserved
C00002/10
0: Off / ready
Reserved
C00002/11
0: Off / ready
Save all parameter sets
• All parameter sets are saved in the memory module
with mains failure protection.
C00002/12
0: Off / ready
Import EPM data
• 0 = inactive
• 1 = activates the automatic import of parameters
from the memory module after the error message
"PS04".
C00002/13
0: Off / ready
Reserved
C00002/14
0: Off / ready
Reserved
C00002/15
0: Off / ready
Reserved
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00002
C00002/6
0: Off / ready
Reserved
C00002/7
0: Off / ready
Save parameter set 1
C00002/8
0: Off / ready
Reserved
C00002/9
0: Off / ready
Reserved
C00002/10
0: Off / ready
Reserved
C00002/11
0: Off / ready
Save all parameter sets
• All parameter sets are saved in the memory module
with mains failure protection.
C00002/12
0: Off / ready
Import EPM data
• 0 = inactive
• 1 = activates the automatic import of parameters
from the memory module after the error message
"PS04".
C00002/13
0: Off / ready
Reserved
C00002/14
0: Off / ready
Reserved
C00002/15
0: Off / ready
Reserved
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
183
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00003
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 24573d = 5FFDh
C00002 | Controller commands
C00002/29
0: Off / ready
Reserved
C00002/30
0: Off / ready
Reserved
C00002/31
0: Off / ready
Reserved
C00002/32
0: Off / ready
Reserved
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00003
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 24572d = 5FFCh
C00003 | Status of last device command
Status of the device command executed last (C00002).
Note:
Before switching off the supply voltage after executing a device command, check the successful execution of the
device command by means of this status display!
Drive control (DCTRL): Device commands
Selection list (read only)
Info
0 Successful
Device command has been executed successfully.
1 Command unknown
Device command is implausible or not known in the
system.
2 No access
Access for required device command is not approved.
3 Time-out
Processing of the device command could not be executed
within the defined time (time-out).
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00006
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 24569d = 5FF9h
C00006 | Select motor control
Selection of motor control type (operating mode)
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
Motor control (MCTRL): Selection of operating mode
Info
4 SLVC: Vector control
This control type is used for sensorless vector control of
an asynchronous motor.
• This control mode needs the motor parameters to be
set as exactly as possible!
6 VFCplus: V/f linear
This control type is used for open-loop speed control of
an asynchronous motor via a linear V/f characteristic and
represents the most simple control type.
• In order to set the V/f characteristic, the rated
frequency (C00089) and rated voltage (C00090) of the
motor must be entered only.
8 VFCplus: V/f quadr
This control type is used for open-loop speed control of
an asynchronous motor via a square-law V/f
characteristic.
• In order to set the V/f characteristic, the rated
frequency (C00089) and rated voltage (C00090) of the
motor must be entered only.
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
184
L
Scaling factor: 1
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00007
C00007
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24568d = 5FF8h
C00007 | Select control mode
Configuration of the digital inputs
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
Info
0 Wiring has changed
This display appears if the defined configuration has
been reparameterised via the connection parameters.
10 Terminal 0
The technology application is controlled using the digital
input terminals of the controller.
• DI1 = JOG 1/3
• DI2 = JOG 2/3
• DI3 = DCB
• DI4 = R/L
12 Terminal 2
The technology application is controlled using the digital
input terminals of the controller.
• DI1 = JOG 1/3
• DI2 = JOG 2/3
• DI3 = QSP
• DI4 = R/L
14 Terminal 11
The technology application is controlled using the digital
input terminals of the controller.
• DI1 = R/L
• DI2 = DCB
• DI3 = MPotUp
• DI4 = MPotDown
16 Terminal 16
The technology application is controlled using the digital
input terminals of the controller.
• DI1 = JOG 1/3
• DI2 = JOG 2/3
• DI3 = R/QSP
• DI4 = L/QSP
20 Keypad
The technology application is controlled via the keypad:
 C00728: Setpoint selections
 C00002: Device commands
 C00003: Status of last device command
 Increase speed
 Reduce speed
21 PC
The technology application is controlled using the "Free
parameters" of the controller (PC control).
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00010
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 24565d = 5FF5h
C00010 | Minimum analog setpoint
From version 03.00.00
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0
%
100.0
Subcodes
Lenze setting
Info
C00010/1
0.0 %
Min. analog setpoint
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
Scaling factor: 100
185
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00011
C00011
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24564d = 5FF4h
C00011 | Appl.: Reference speed
Setting of the reference speed
• In the controller, all speed-related signals are processed to one reference variable in percent.
• Set a reference speed here that corresponds to 100 %.
Note:
This is not a maximum limitation!
All values in percent in the controller may be in the range of 0 ... 199.99 %.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
50
rpm
Lenze setting
9999 1500 rpm
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00012
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_32
Index: 24563d = 5FF3h
C00012 | Accel. time - main setpoint
FB L_NSet_1: Acceleration time of the ramp generator for the main speed setpoint
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0
s
Lenze setting
999.9 2.0 s
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00013
Scaling factor: 1000
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_32
Index: 24562d = 5FF2h
C00013 | Decel. time - main setpoint
FB L_NSet_1: Deceleration time of the ramp generator for the main speed setpoint
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0
s
Lenze setting
999.9 2.0 s
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00015
Scaling factor: 1000
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24560d = 5FF0h
C00015 | VFC: V/f base frequency
V/f base frequency for VFCplus operating mode
• The motor voltage increases linearly with the frequency until the base frequency is reached. From this value on,
the motor voltage remains constant, the speed increases and the maximum torque decreases.
• After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor catalogue, the suitable value can be entered
automatically. An automatic detection via the motor parameter identification is possible as well.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
7.5
Hz
Lenze setting
999.9 50.0 Hz
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM ; MOT
C00016
Scaling factor: 10
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24559d = 5FEFh
C00016 | VFC: Vmin boost
Boost of the V/f voltage characteristic within a small speed or frequency range for the VFCplus operating mode
• This may increase the starting torque.
• After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor catalogue, the suitable value can be entered
automatically. An automatic detection via the motor parameter identification is possible as well.
Motor control (MCTRL): Setting Vmin boost
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0
%
Lenze setting
100.0 0.0 %
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
186
L
Scaling factor: 100
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00018 |
C00018 |
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 24557d = 5FEDh
C00018 | Switching frequency
Selection of the pulse width modulated switching frequency transferred from the inverter to the motor
• When a variable switching frequency is selected, the switching frequency may change as a function of the load
and rotational frequency.
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
1 4 kHz var./drive-optimised
2 8 kHz var./drive-optimised
3 16 kHz var./drive-optimised
5 2 kHz constant/drive-optimised
6 4 kHz constant/drive-optimised
7 8 kHz constant/drive-optimised
8 16 kHz constant/drive-optimised
21 8 kHz var/4 kHz min.
22 16 kHz var/4 kHz min.
23 16 kHz var/8 kHz min.
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00019
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24556d = 5FECh
C00019 | Auto-DCB: Threshold
Setpoint speed threshold for the automatic DC injection brake
• For speed setpoints with values below the thresholds a DC current is injected or the motor is not supplied with
current, depending on the setting.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0
rpm
Lenze setting
9999 3 rpm
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00021
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 24554d = 5FEAh
C00021 | Slip comp.
Slip compensation for VFCplus and SLVC operating modes
• An increase of the slip compensation causes a greater frequency and voltage increase when the machine is
loaded.
• After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor catalogue, the suitable value can be entered
automatically. An automatic detection via the motor parameter identification is possible as well.
Motor control (MCTRL): Optimising the operational performance by slip compensation
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-50.00
%
Lenze setting
50.00 0.00 %
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00022 |
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24553d = 5FE9h
C00022 | Imax in motor mode
Maximum current in motor mode for all operating modes
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00
A
Lenze setting
99.99 47.00 A
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No Transfer … COM … MOT
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
Scaling factor: 100
187
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00023
C00023
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 24552d = 5FE8h
C00023 | Imax in generator mode
Maximum current in generator mode for all operating modes
• 100 % ≡ Imax in motor mode (C00022)
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0
Lenze setting
%
100.0 100.0 %
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No Transfer … COM … MOT
C00024 |
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 24551d = 5FE7h
C00024 | Comparison value N_Act
Threshold for the actual speed comparison
• This parameter serves to set a threshold that is compared with the actual speed value.
• When the value falls below this threshold, the bNactCompare output of the SB LS_DriveInterface switches to
TRUE.
• Switching hysteresis = +1 %
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0
Lenze setting
%
199.9 0.0 %
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No Transfer … COM … MOT
C00026
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 24549d = 5FE5h
C00026 | AINx: Offset
Offset for analog input
I/O terminals
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-199.9
%
199.9
Subcodes
Lenze setting
Info
C00026/1
0.0 %
AIN1: Offset
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No Transfer … COM … MOT
C00027
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_32
Index: 24548d = 5FE4h
C00027 | AINx: Gain
Gain for analog input
I/O terminals
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-199.9
%
199.9
Subcodes
Lenze setting
Info
C00027/1
100.0 %
AIN1: Gain
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No Transfer … COM … MOT
C00028 |
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 24547d = 5FE3h
C00028 | AINx: Input voltage
Display of the input voltage at the analog input
I/O terminals
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-10.0
V
10.0
Subcodes
Info
C00028/1
AIN1: Input voltage
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No Transfer … COM … MOT
188
L
Scaling factor: 100
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00029 |
C00029 |
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 24546d = 5FE2h
C00029 | AINx: Input current
Display of the input current at the analog input
• When the analog input is configured for current measurement (C00034/1 = 1 or 2).
• When C00034/1 is set = 2 (4 ... 20 mA), 0 ... 16 mA is displayed.
I/O terminals
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0
mA
20.0
Subcodes
Info
C00029/1
AIN1: Input current
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No Transfer … COM … MOT
C00033 |
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 24542d = 5FDEh
C00033 | AINx: Output value
Display of the output value in percent of the analog input amplifier
• 100 % ≡ 16384 ≡ +10 V / +20 mA
I/O terminals
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-199.9
%
199.9
Subcodes
Info
C00033/1
AIN1: Output value
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No Transfer … COM … MOT
C00034 |
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 24541d = 5FDDh
C00034 | AINx: Configuration
Configuration of the analog input for current or voltage measurement
Selection list
0 0...+10 V
Input signal is the voltage signal 0 V ... +10 V
• 0 V ... +10 V ≡ 0 % ... +100 %
1 0...+5V
With external load resistor (250 Ohms):
Input signal is the current signal 0 mA ... 20 mA
• 0 mA ... 20 mA ≡ 0 % ... +100 %
2 1...+5V (4...20mA)
With external load resistor (250 Ohms):
Input signal is the current signal 4 mA ... 20 mA
• 4 mA ... 20 mA ≡ 0 % ... +100 %
• The current loop is monitored for open circuit
(I < 4 mA) by the device .
Subcodes
Lenze setting
Info
C00034/1
0: 0...+10 V
AIN1: Config.
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00036
I/O terminals
Info
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 24539d = 5FDBh
C00036 | DCB: Current
Current value in [%] for DC-injection braking
• 100 % ≡ Imax in motor mode (C00022)
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0
%
Lenze setting
150.0 50.0 %
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
Scaling factor: 100
189
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00039 |
C00039 |
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 24536d = 5FD8h
C00039 | Fixed setpoint x (L_NSet_1 n-Fix)
FB L_NSet_1: Fixed speed setpoints (Jog values) for the setpoint generator
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-199.9
%
199.9
Subcodes
Lenze setting
Info
C00039/1
40.0 %
Fixed setpoint 1
C00039/2
60.0 %
Fixed setpoint 2
C00039/3
80.0 %
Fixed setpoint 3
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00050 |
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_32
Index: 24525d = 5FCDh
C00050 | MCTRL: Speed setpoint
Display of the speed setpoint at the speed setpoint input of the motor control.
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-9999
rpm
9999
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00051 |
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_32
Index: 24524d = 5FCCh
C00051 | MCTRL: Actual speed value
Display of the actual speed value of the motor shaft
Note:
The displayed value only corresponds to the real actual speed value of the motor shaft if an encoder is connected to
the motor and the evaluation of the feedback signal has been set correctly ("Closed loop" operation).
In case of operation without feedback, the signal is calculated from the motor control and thus may not correspond
to the real actual speed.
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-9999
rpm
9999
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00052 |
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24523d = 5FCBh
C00052 | Motor voltage
Display of the current motor voltage/output voltage of the inverter
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0
V
1000
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00053 |
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24522d = 5FCAh
C00053 | DC-bus voltage
Display of the current DC-bus voltage
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0
V
1000
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
190
L
Scaling factor: 1
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00054 |
C00054 |
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24521d = 5FC9h
C00054 | Motor current
Display of the current motor current /output current of the inverter
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00
A
300.00
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00056 |
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_32
Index: 24519d = 5FC7h
C00056 | Torque
Display of the current motor torque
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-99.00
Nm
99.00
Subcodes
Info
C00056/1
Torque setpoint
• Only for SLVC operating mode.
C00056/2
Torque actual value
• Estimated actual torque for all operating modes.
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00057 |
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_32
Index: 24518d = 5FC6h
C00057 | Maximum torque
Display of the maximum torque to be generated by the motor
• The maximum torque to be generated by the motor depends on various factors, e.g. on Imax in motor mode
(C00022) and the motor type used.
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0
Nm
999.9
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00058 |
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_32
Index: 24517d = 5FC5h
C00058 | Output frequency
Display of the current output frequency
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-655.0
Hz
655.0
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00059 |
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_32
Index: 24516d = 5FC4h
C00059 | Appl.: Reference frequency C11
Display of the field frequency which corresponds to the reference speed set in C00011.
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0
Hz
999.9
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00061
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 24514d = 5FC2h
C00061 | Heatsink temperature
Display of the current heatsink temperature
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-50
°C
150
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
Scaling factor: 1
191
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00064
C00064
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 24511d = 5FBFh
C00064 | Device utilisation (Ixt)
Display of the device utilisation Ixt in different time resolutions
• If the value displayed here exceeds the threshold set in C00123, the fault message "OC5: Device overload (Ixt)"
is output and the fault response set in C00604 is executed (default setting: "Warning").
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0
%
250
Subcodes
Info
C00064/1
Device utilisation (Ixt)
• Maximum value of the pulse utilisation (C00064/2)
and permanent utilisation (C00064/3).
C00064/2
Device utilisation (Ixt) 15s
• Pulse utilisation via the last 15 seconds (only for loads
>160 %).
C00064/3
Device utilisation (Ixt) 3min
• Permanent utilisation via the last 3 minutes.
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00066
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 24509d = 5FBDh
C00066 | Thermal motor load (I²xt)
Display of the thermal motor load being detected sensorless via a motor model
• If the value displayed here exceeds the threshold set in C00120, the fault message "OC6: Device overload (Ixt)"
is output and the fault response set in C00606 is executed (default setting: "Warning").
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0
%
200
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00073
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24502d = 5FB6h
C00073 | Vp Imax controller
Gain factor Vp for Imax controller
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00
Lenze setting
16.00 0.25
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM ; MOT
C00074
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24501d = 5FB5h
C00074 | Ti Imax controller
Reset time Ti for Imax controller
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
12
ms
Lenze setting
9990 65 ms
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM ; MOT
C00081
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24494d = 5FAEh
C00081 | Rated motor power
This value can be obtained from the motor nameplate. After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor
catalogue, the suitable value can be entered automatically.
Note:
It is mandatory to give the rated motor power for the field-oriented operating mode (SLVC).
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00
kW
Lenze setting
99.00 11.00 kW
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM ; MOT
192
L
Scaling factor: 100
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00084
C00084
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_32
Index: 24491d = 5FABh
C00084 | Motor stator resistance
After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor catalogue, the suitable value can be entered
automatically. An automatic detection via the motor parameter identification is possible as well.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0
mOhm
Lenze setting
200000 330 mOhm
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM ; MOT
C00085
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24490d = 5FAAh
C00085 | Motor stator leakage inductance
After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor catalogue, the suitable value can be entered
automatically. An automatic detection via the motor parameter identification is possible as well.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00
mH
Lenze setting
650.00 0.00 mH
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM ; MOT
C00087
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24488d = 5FA8h
C00087 | Rated motor speed
This value can be obtained from the motor nameplate. After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor
catalogue, the suitable value can be entered automatically.
Note:
It is mandatory to give the rated motor speed for the field-oriented operating mode (SLVC).
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
50
rpm
Lenze setting
9999 1460 rpm
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM ; MOT
C00088
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24487d = 5FA7h
C00088 | Rated motor current
This value can be obtained from the motor nameplate. After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor
catalogue, the suitable value can be entered automatically.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00
A
Lenze setting
99.00 21.00 A
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM ; MOT
C00089
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24486d = 5FA6h
C00089 | Rated motor frequency
This value can be obtained from the motor nameplate. After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor
catalogue, the suitable value can be entered automatically.
Note:
It is mandatory to give the rated motor frequency for the field-oriented operating mode (SLVC).
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
10
Hz
Lenze setting
1000 50 Hz
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM ; MOT
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
Scaling factor: 1
193
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00090
C00090
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24485d = 5FA5h
C00090 | Rated motor voltage
This value can be obtained from the motor nameplate. After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor
catalogue, the suitable value can be entered automatically.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0
V
Lenze setting
1000 400 V
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM ; MOT
C00091
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 24484d = 5FA4h
C00091 | Motor cosine phi
This value can be obtained from the motor nameplate. After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor
catalogue, the suitable value can be entered automatically.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.40
Lenze setting
1.00 0.85
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM ; MOT
C00092
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24483d = 5FA3h
C00092 | Motor magnetizing inductance
After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor catalogue, the suitable value can be entered
automatically. An automatic detection via the motor parameter identification is possible as well.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0
mH
Lenze setting
6500.0 0.0 mH
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM ; MOT
C00093
Scaling factor: 10
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24482d = 5FA2h
C00093 | Power section ID
Display of the identification of the detected power section of the frequency inverter
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0
65535
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00094
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_32
Index: 24481d = 5FA1h
C00094 | Password
The controller provides the opportunity to protect the menu level from unauthorised access by assigning a
password.
Password protection
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0
Lenze setting
9999 0
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00095
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24480d = 5FA0h
C00095 | Motor magnetising current
From version 03.00.00
After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor catalogue, the suitable value can be entered
automatically. An automatic detection via the motor parameter identification is possible as well.
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00
A
99.00
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM ; MOT
194
L
Scaling factor: 100
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00097
C00097
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_32
Index: 24478d = 5F9Eh
C00097 | Rated motor torque
Display of the rated motor torque
• The value displayed here is calculated from different parameters, e.g. the maximum current set in C00022.
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00
Nm
99.00
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00098
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24477d = 5F9Dh
C00098 | Rated device current
Display of the rated inverter current which is defined by the integrated power section.
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0
A
999.0
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00099
Scaling factor: 10
Parameter | Name:
Data type: VISIBLE_STRING
Index: 24476d = 5F9Ch
C00099 | Firmware version
Display of the firmware version of the device as string
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 24475d = 5F9Bh
C00100 | Firmware version
Display of the firmware version of the device, divided into subsections.
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0
99
Subcodes
Info
C00100/1
Firmware version - main version
C00100/2
Firmware version - subversion
C00100/3
Firmware version - release
C00100/4
Firmware version build
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00105
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_32
Index: 24470d = 5F96h
C00105 | Deceleration time - quick stop
The set deceleration time determines the ramp slope at quick stop
• If the output frequency falls below the threshold set in C00019, the DCB DC injection brake is activated.
Note:
The S-ramp time set in C00182 is also effective at quick stop!
In order to reach the required deceleration time for quick stop, set accordingly less time in this parameter.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0
s
Lenze setting
999.9 5.0 s
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
Scaling factor: 1000
195
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00106
C00106
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_32
Index: 24469d = 5F95h
C00106 | Auto-DCB: hold time
Hold time of the automatic DC injection brake
• The DC injection brake is applied for the time set here if the value falls below the speed setpoint set in C00019.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0
s
Lenze setting
999.0 0.5 s
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00107
Scaling factor: 1000
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_32
Index: 24468d = 5F94h
C00107 | DCB: hold time
Maximum hold time of the manual DC injection brake
• In order to not overload the motor thermally, a time for automatic switch-off of the DC injection brake can be set
here.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0
s
Lenze setting
999.0 999.0 s
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00114
Scaling factor: 1000
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24461d = 5F8Dh
C00114 | DIx inversion
Polarity of the digital inputs
• Every digital input of the device can be inverted with regard to polarity via this bit field.
Setting range (min. hex value | max. hex value)
0x0000
I/O terminals
Lenze setting
0xFFFF 0x8000 (decimal: 32768)
Value is bit-coded: (; = bit set)
Info
Bit 0 … DI1 inverted
Inversion of digital input 1
Bit 1 … DI2 inverted
Inversion of digital input 2
Bit 2 … DI3 inverted
Inversion of digital input 3
Bit 3 … DI4 inverted
Inversion of digital input 4
Bit 4 … Reserved
Bit 5 … Reserved
Bit 6 … Reserved
Bit 7 … Reserved
Bit 8 … Reserved
Bit 9 … Reserved
Bit 10 … Reserved
Bit 11 … Reserved
Bit 12 … Reserved
Bit 13 … Reserved
Bit 14 … Reserved
Bit 15 ; RFR inverted
Inversion of digital input CInh (controller inhibit)
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
196
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00118
C00118
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 24457d = 5F89h
C00118 | DOx inversion
Polarity of the digital outputs
• Every digital output of the device can be inverted with regard to polarity via this bit field.
Setting range (min. hex value | max. hex value)
0x00
I/O terminals
Lenze setting
0xFF 0x00 (decimal: 0)
Value is bit-coded: (; = bit set)
Info
Bit 0 … Relay inverted
Relay inversion
Bit 1 … DO1 inverted
Inversion of digital output 1
Bit 2 … Reserved
Bit 3 … Reserved
Bit 4 … Reserved
Bit 5 … Reserved
Bit 6 … Reserved
Bit 7 … Reserved
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00120
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 24455d = 5F87h
C00120 | Motor overload threshold (I²xt)
Operating threshold for the error message "OC6: Motor overload (I²xt)"
• The response for reaching the threshold can be selected in C00606.
• The current thermal motor load is displayed in C00066.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0
%
Lenze setting
250 100 %
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00123
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 24452d = 5F84h
C00123 | Device utilisat. threshold (Ixt)
Operating threshold for the error message "OC5: Device overload (Ixt)"
• The response for reaching the threshold can be selected in C00604.
• The current device utilisation is displayed in C00064.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0
%
Lenze setting
100 100 %
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00134
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 24441d = 5F79h
C00134 | Ramp smoothing main setpoint
Configuration of the ramp rounding for the main setpoint
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
Info
0 Off
Ramp rounding deactivated
1 PT1 behaviour
Ramp rounding with PT1 behaviour
• The corresponding S-ramp time must be set in
C00182.
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
Scaling factor: 1
197
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00137
C00137
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24438d = 5F76h
C00137 | Device state
Display of the current device state
Selection list (read only)
0 reserved
1 Init
2 MotorIdent
3 ReadySwitchON
4 SwitchedON
5 OperationEnable
6 reserved
7 Trouble
8 Fault
9 reserved
10 SafeTorqueOff
11 reserved
12 reserved
13 reserved
14 reserved
15 reserved
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00141
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 24434d = 5F72h
C00141 | Device settings
From version 03.00.00
Selection list
0 inactive
1 active
Subcodes
Lenze setting
Info
C00141/1
0: inactive
always save parameter
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
198
L
Scaling factor: 1
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00142
C00142
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 24433d = 5F71h
C00142 | Auto-start option
Setting of the "Auto-start" function
• When inhibit is activated, the motor can only start after the device state has changed.
Setting range (min. hex value | max. hex value)
0x00
Lenze setting
0xFF 0x01 (decimal: 1)
Value is bit-coded: (; = bit set)
Bit 0 ; Inhibit at power-on
Bit 1 … Inhibit at trouble
Bit 2 … Inhibit at fault
Bit 3 … Reserved
Bit 4 … Reserved
Bit 5 … Reserved
Bit 6 … Reserved
Bit 7 … Reserved
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00144
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 24431d = 5F6Fh
C00144 | Switching freq. reduct. (temp.)
Activation of the automatic switching frequency reduction at too high temperature
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
Info
0 Off
Automatic switching frequency reduction deactivated
1 On
Automatic switching frequency reduction activated
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
Scaling factor: 1
199
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00150
C00150
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24425d = 5F69h
C00150 | Status word
Bit coded device status word
Display range (min. hex value | max. hex value)
0x0000
0xFFFF
Value is bit-coded:
Info
Bit 0 FreeStatusBit0
Free status bit 0
Bit 1 PowerDisabled
Power switched off
Bit 2 FreeStatusBit2
Free status bit 2
Bit 3 FreeStatusBit3
Free status bit 3
Bit 4 FreeStatusBit4
?Free status bit 4
Bit 5 FreeStatusBit5
?Free status bit 5
Bit 6 ActSpeedIsZero
Current speed is 0
Bit 7 ControllerInhibit
Controller is inhibited
Bit 8 StatusCodeBit0
Status code bit 0
Bit 9 StatusCodeBit1
Status code bit 1
Bit 10 StatusCodeBit2
Status code bit 2
Bit 11 StatusCodeBit3
Status code bit 3
Bit 12 Warning
Warning
Bit 13 Trouble
Fault
Bit 14 FreeStatusBit14
?Free status bit 14
Bit 15 FreeStatusBit15
?Free status bit 15
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
200
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00155
C00155
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24420d = 5F64h
C00155 | Status word 2
Bit coded device status word 2
Display range (min. hex value | max. hex value)
0x0000
0xFFFF
Value is bit-coded:
Info
Bit 0 Fail
Fail
Bit 1 M_max
Maximum torque
Bit 2 I_max
Maximum current
Bit 3 PowerDisabled
Power switched off
Bit 4 Ready
Ready
Bit 5 ControllerInhibit
Controller is inhibited
Bit 6 Trouble
Fault
Bit 7 InitState
InitState
Bit 8 CwCcw
CW/CCW rotation
Bit 9 reserved
Bit 10 SafeTorqueOff
Safe torque off
Bit 11 reserved
Bit 12 reserved
Bit 13 reserved
Bit 14 Quick stop
Quick stop is active
Bit 15 MotorIdent
Motor parameter identification active
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
201
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00158
C00158
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24417d = 5F61h
C00158 | Cause of controller inhibit
Bit coded display of the cause/source of controller inhibit
Display range (min. hex value | max. hex value)
0x0000
0xFFFF
Value is bit-coded:
Bit 0 Terminal controller enable
Bit 1 Reserved
Bit 2 Reserved
Bit 3 Reserved
Bit 4 Application
Bit 5 Controller command
Bit 6 Error response
Bit 7 Reserved
Bit 8 Reserved
Bit 9 Reserved
Bit 10 AutoStartLock
Bit 11 Motor parameter identification
Bit 12 Reserved
Bit 13 DCB-IMP
Bit 14 Reserved
Bit 15 Reserved
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
202
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00159
C00159
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24416d = 5F60h
C00159 | Cause of quick stop QSP
Bit coded display of the cause/source of quick stop
Display range (min. hex value | max. hex value)
0x0000
0xFFFF
Value is bit-coded:
Bit 0 Terminal
Bit 1 Reserved
Bit 2 Reserved
Bit 3 Reserved
Bit 4 Application
Bit 5 Controller command
Bit 6 Reserved
Bit 7 Reserved
Bit 8 Reserved
Bit 9 Reserved
Bit 10 Reserved
Bit 11 Reserved
Bit 12 Reserved
Bit 13 Reserved
Bit 14 Reserved
Bit 15 Reserved
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00165
Parameter | Name:
Data type: VISIBLE_STRING
Index: 24410d = 5F5Ah
C00165 | Error information
Display of the error numbers divided into sectors in the case of an error
Subcodes
Info
C00165/1
Current error
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00166
Parameter | Name:
Data type: VISIBLE_STRING
Index: 24409d = 5F59h
C00166 | Error information text
Display of details on the currently pending error
Subcodes
Info
C00166/1
Resp. - current error
• Response of the currently pending error
C00166/2
Subj. - current error
• Subject area of the currently pending error
C00166/3
Mess. - current error
• Textual message of the currently pending error
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00167
Parameter | Name:
Data type: OCTET_STRING
Index: 24408d = 5F58h
C00167 | Logbook data
This code is used internally by the controller and must not be overwritten by the user!
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
203
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00168
C00168
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_32
Index: 24407d = 5F57h
C00168 | Error number
Display of the internal error number for the 8 errors occurred last
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0
4294967295
Subcodes
Info
C00168/1
Error number - history 1
C00168/2
Error number - history 2
C00168/3
Error number - history 3
C00168/4
Error number - history 4
C00168/5
Error number - history 5
C00168/6
Error number - history 6
C00168/7
Error number - history 7
C00168/8
Error number - history 8
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00169
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_32
Index: 24406d = 5F56h
C00169 | Time of error
Display of the time of error for the 8 errors occurred last
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0
4294967295
Subcodes
Info
C00169/1
Error time- history 1
C00169/2
Error time- history 2
C00169/3
Error time- history 3
C00169/4
Error time- history 4
C00169/5
Error time- history 5
C00169/6
Error time- history 6
C00169/7
Error time- history 7
C00169/8
Error time- history 8
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
204
L
Scaling factor: 1
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00170
C00170
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 24405d = 5F55h
C00170 | Error counter
Display of the error counter for the 8 errors occurred last
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0
255
Subcodes
Info
C00170/1
Error counter - history 1
C00170/2
Error counter - history 2
C00170/3
Error counter - history 3
C00170/4
Error counter - history 4
C00170/5
Error counter - history 5
C00170/6
Error counter - history 6
C00170/7
Error counter - history 7
C00170/8
Error counter - history 8
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00171
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 24404d = 5F54h
C00171 | Logbook access index
This code is used internally by the controller and must not be overwritten by the user!
C00173
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 24402d = 5F52h
C00173 | Mains voltage
Selection of the mains voltage for operating the device.
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
Info
0 3ph 400V / 1ph 230V
3-phase 400 V or 1-phase 230 V
1 3ph 440V / 1ph 230V
3-phase 440 V or 1-phase 230 V
2 3ph 480V / 1ph 230V
3-phase 480 V or 1-phase 230 V
3 3ph 500V / 1ph 230V
3-phase 500 V or 1-phase 230 V
; Read access ; Write access ; CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00174
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 24401d = 5F51h
C00174 | Reduced brake chopper threshold
The threshold from which on the brake chopper is controlled is reduced by the voltage value set here.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0
V
Lenze setting
150 0 V
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00177
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_32
Index: 24398d = 5F4Eh
C00177 | Switching cycles
Counter of different switching cycles and stressful situations
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0
2147483647
Subcodes
Info
C00177 /1
Number of mains switching cycles
C00177 /2
Number of the switching cycles of the output relay
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
Scaling factor: 1
205
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00178
C00178
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_32
Index: 24397d = 5F4Dh
C00178 | Elapsed-hour meter
Display of the operating hours in "seconds" unit"
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0
s
2147483647
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00179
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_32
Index: 24396d = 5F4Ch
C00179 | Power-on time meter
Display of the power-on time in "seconds" unit"
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0
s
2147483647
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00182
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 24393d = 5F49h
C00182 | S-ramp time PT1
PT1 S-ramp time for the main setpoint ramp function generator
• Only effective with activated ramp rounding (C00134 = "1").
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.01
Lenze setting
s
50.00 20.00 s
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00200
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: VISIBLE_STRING
Index: 24375d = 5F37h
C00200 | Firmware product type
Display of the firmware product type
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00201
Parameter | Name:
Data type: VISIBLE_STRING
Index: 24374d = 5F36h
C00201 | Firmware compile date
Display of the firmware compilation date
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00203
Parameter | Name:
Data type: VISIBLE_STRING
Index: 24372d = 5F34h
C00203 | Product type code
From version 03.00.00
Display of the single device component types
Subcodes
Info
C00203/1
Reserved
C00203/2
Reserved
C00203/3
Reserved
C00203/4
Reserved
C00203/5
Type: Memory module
C00203/6
Type: Safety module
C00203/7
Reserved
C00203/8
Type: Complete device
C00203/9
Reserved
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
206
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00222
C00222
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 24353d = 5F21h
C00222 | L_PCTRL_1: Vp
From version 03.00.00
FB L_PCTRL_1: Gain factor Vp for the PID process controller
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.1
Lenze setting
500.0 1.0
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00223
Scaling factor: 10
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24352d = 5F20h
C00223 | L_PCTRL_1: Tn
From version 03.00.00
FB L_PCTRL_1: Reset time Tr for the PID process controller
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
20
ms
Lenze setting
6000 400 ms
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00224
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24351d = 5F1Fh
C00224 | L_PCTRL_1: Kd
From version 03.00.00
FB L_PCTRL_1: Derivative-action coefficient Kd for the PID process controller
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0
Lenze setting
5.0 0.0
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00225
Scaling factor: 10
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 24350d = 5F1Eh
C00225 | L_PCTRL_1: MaxLimit
From version 03.00.00
FB L_PCTRL_1: Maximum output value of the PID process controller
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-199.9
%
Lenze setting
199.9 199.9 %
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00226
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 24349d = 5F1Dh
C00226 | L_PCTRL_1: MinLimit
From version 03.00.00
FB L_PCTRL_1: Minimum output value of the PID process controller
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-199.9
%
Lenze setting
199.9 -199.9 %
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00227
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_32
Index: 24348d = 5F1Ch
C00227 | L_PCTRL_1: acceleration time
From version 03.00.00
FB L_PCTRL_1: Acceleration time for the output value of the PID process controller
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0
s
Lenze setting
999.9 0.1 s
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
Scaling factor: 1000
207
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00228
C00228
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_32
Index: 24347d = 5F1Bh
C00228 | L_PCTRL_1: deceleration time
From version 03.00.00
FB L_PCTRL_1: Deceleration time for the output value of the PID process controller
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0
Lenze setting
s
999.9 0.1 s
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00231
Scaling factor: 1000
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 24344d = 5F18h
C00231 | L_PCTRL_1: Operating range
From version 03.00.00
FB L_PCTRL_1: Operating range for the PID process controller
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0
Subcodes
%
199.9
Lenze setting
Info
C00231/1
199.9 %
L_PCTRL_1: Pos. maximum
C00231/2
0.0 %
L_PCTRL_1: Pos. minimum
C00231/3
0.0 %
L_PCTRL_1: Neg. minimum
C00231/4
199.9 %
L_PCTRL_1: Neg. maximum
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00234
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24341d = 5F15h
C00234 | Oscillation damping influence
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0
Lenze setting
%
250 5 %
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00235
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 24340d = 5F14h
C00235 | Filter time - oscill. damping
This code is used internally by the controller and must not be overwritten by the user!
C00236
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 24339d = 5F13h
C00236 | Oscill. damping - field weakening
This code is used internally by the controller and must not be overwritten by the user!
208
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00242
C00242
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 24333d = 5F0Dh
C00242 | L_PCTRL_1: operating mode
From version 03.00.00
FB L_PCTRL_1: Selection of the operating mode
• Depending on the selection, the blue switches in the displayed signal flow are set accordingly in the Engineer on
the Application parameter tab in the Overview  Signal flow  Process controller dialog level.
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
Info
0 Off
The input setpoint nNSet_a is output without any
changes at the nOut_a output.
1 Additive + feedforward control
nNSet_a and nAct_a are used as PID input values. The
input setpoint nNSet_a is added to the value output by
the PID element.
2 PID as setpoint generator
nSet_a and nAct_a are used as PID input values. The
nNSet_a input is not considered.
3 PID setpoint from L_NSet_1
nNSet_a and nAct_a are used as PID input values. The
nSet_a is not considered.
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00243
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_32
Index: 24332d = 5F0Ch
C00243 | L_PCTRL_1: Acceleration time influence
From version 03.00.00
FB L_PCTRL_1: Acceleration time for showing the PID output value
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0
Lenze setting
s
999.9 5.0 s
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00244
Scaling factor: 1000
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_32
Index: 24331d = 5F0Bh
C00244 | L_PCTRL_1: Deceleration time influence
From version 03.00.00
FB L_PCTRL_1: Deceleration time for masking out the PID output value
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0
s
Lenze setting
999.9 5.0 s
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00245
Scaling factor: 1000
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 24330d = 5F0Ah
C00245 | L_PCTRL_1: PID output value
From version 03.00.00
FB L_PCTRL_1: Display of the output value of the PID process controller
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-199.9
%
199.9
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
Scaling factor: 100
209
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00443
C00443
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24132d = 5E44h
C00443 | DIx: Level
Bit coded display of the level of the digital inputs
I/O terminals
Display range (min. hex value | max. hex value)
0x0000
0xFFFF
Value is bit-coded:
Info
Bit 0 DI1
Bit set = HIGH level
Bit 1 DI2
Bit 2 DI3
Bit 3 DI4
Bit 4 Reserve
Bit 5 Reserve
Bit 6 Reserve
Bit 7 Reserve
Bit 8 Reserve
Bit 9 Reserve
Bit 10 Reserve
Bit 11 Reserve
Bit 12 Reserve
Bit 13 Reserve
Bit 14 Reserve
Bit 15 CINH
Subcodes
Info
C00443/1
DIx: Terminal level
C00443/2
DIx: Output level
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
210
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00444
C00444
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24131d = 5E43h
C00444 | DOx: Level
Bit coded display of the level of the digital outputs
I/O terminals
Display range (min. hex value | max. hex value)
0x0000
0xFFFF
Value is bit-coded:
Info
Bit 0 Relay
Bit set = HIGH level
Bit 1 DO1
Bit 2 Reserved
Bit 3 Reserved
Bit 4 Reserved
Bit 5 Reserved
Bit 6 Reserved
Bit 7 Reserved
Bit 8 Reserved
Bit 9 Reserved
Bit 10 Reserved
Bit 11 Reserved
Bit 12 Reserved
Bit 13 Reserved
Bit 14 Reserved
Bit 15 Reserved
Subcodes
Info
C00444/1
DOx: Input level
C00444/2
DOx: Terminal level
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00470
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 24105d = 5E29h
C00470 | LS_ParFree_b
SB LS_ParFree_b: Setting of the signal level to be output
Selection list
0 False
1 True
Subcodes
Lenze setting
Info
C00470/1
0: False
Signal level for output bPar1 ... bPar16
C00470/...
C00470/16
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
Scaling factor: 1
211
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00472
C00472
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 24103d = 5E27h
C00472 | LS_ParFree_a
SB LS_ParFree_a: Setting of the analog signals to be output
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-199.9
%
199.9
Subcodes
Lenze setting
Info
C00472/1
0.0 %
Value for output nPar1_a
C00472/2
0.0 %
Value for output nPar2_a
C00472/3
100.0 %
Value for output nPar3_a
C00472/4
100.0 %
Value for output nPar4_a
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00480
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 24095d = 5E1Fh
C00480 | LS_DisFree_b
SB LS_DisFree_b: Display of the input values
Display range (min. hex value | max. hex value)
0x00
0xFF
Value is bit-coded:
Info
Bit 0 bDis1
Signal level input bDis1 ... bDis8
... ...
Bit 7 bDis8
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00481
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 24094d = 5E1Eh
C00481 | LS_DisFree
SB LS_DisFree: Display of the input values
Display range (min. hex value | max. hex value)
0x0000
0xFFFF
Value is bit-coded:
Bit 0 Bit0
... ...
Bit 15 Bit15
Subcodes
Info
C00481/1
Input values wDis1 ... wDis4
C00481/...
C00481/4
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
212
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00482
C00482
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 24093d = 5E1Dh
C00482 | LS_DisFree_a
SB LS_DisFree_a: Display of the input values
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-199.9
%
199.9
Subcodes
Info
C00482/1
Input values nDis1_a ... nDis4_a
C00482/...
C00482/4
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00516
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_32
Index: 24059d = 5DFBh
C00516 | Checksums
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0
255
Subcodes
Info
C00516/1
Checksum of the interconnection
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
Scaling factor: 1
213
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00517
C00517
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_32
Index: 24058d = 5DFAh
C00517 | User menu
When a system is installed, parameters must be changed time and again until the system runs satisfactorily. The
user menu of a device serves to create a selection of frequently used parameters to be able to access and change
these parameters quickly.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0
994
Subcodes
Lenze setting
Info
C00517/1
51
C00051: Display of actual speed value
C00517/2
53
C00053: Display of DC-bus voltage
C00517/3
54
C00054: Display of motor current
C00517/4
61
C00061: Display of heatsink temperature
C00517/5
137
C00137: Display of device state
C00517/6
0
C00517/7
0
C00517/8
11
C00011: Reference speed
C00517/9
39
C00039: Fixed setpoints 1 ... 3
C00517/10
0
C00517/11
12
C00012: Accel. time - main setpoint
C00517/12
13
C00013: Decel. time - main setpoint
C00517/13
15
C00015: V/f base frequency
C00517/14
16
C00016: Vmin boost
C00517/15
22
C00022: Imax in motor mode
C00517/16
120
C00120: Motor overload threshold (I2xt)
C00517/17
87
C00087: Rated motor speed
C00517/18
99
C00099: Display of firmware version
C00517/19
0
C00517/20
0
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00565
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 24010d = 5DCAh
C00565 | Resp. to mains phase failure
Response to the failure of mains phases
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
0 No Reaction
1 Fault
4 WarningLocked
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00574
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 24001d = 5DC1h
C00574 | Resp. to brake resist. overtemp.
Response to overtemperature of the brake resistor
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
0 No Reaction
1 Fault
4 WarningLocked
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
214
L
Scaling factor: 1
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00581
C00581
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 23994d = 5DBAh
C00581 | Resp. LS_SetError_x
SB LS_SetError_1: Selection of the error responses for application error messages
• An application error message is tripped by a FALSE-TRUE edge at the binary inputs bSetError1...2.
Selection list
0 No Reaction
1 Fault
2 Trouble
4 WarningLocked
Subcodes
Lenze setting
Info
C00581/1
1: Fault
Resp. LS_SetError_1 bSetError1
C00581/2
1: Fault
Resp. LS_SetError_1 bSetError2
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00598
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 23977d = 5DA9h
C00598 | Resp. to open circuit AINx
Configuration of monitoring of the analog input
Selection list
0 No Reaction
1 Fault
2 Trouble
4 WarningLocked
Subcodes
Lenze setting
Info
C00598/1
1: Fault
Response to open circuit at AIN1 when being configured
as 4 ... 20 mA current loop
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00600
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 23975d = 5DA7h
C00600 | Resp. to DC bus overvoltage
Configuration of monitoring of the motor control (group 3)
Selection list
1 Fault
2 Trouble
Subcodes
Lenze setting
Info
C00600/1
2: Trouble
Resp. to undervoltage in the DC bus
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00601
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 23974d = 5DA6h
C00601 | Del. resp.to fault: DC bus overvoltage
Delay times for error responses
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00
s
65.00
Subcodes
Lenze setting
Info
C00601/1
2.00 s
Delay time for error activation "DC-bus overvoltage"
• In case of DC-bus overvoltage, an error is only
transmitted after this delay time has elapsed.
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
Scaling factor: 1000
215
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00604
C00604
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 23971d = 5DA3h
C00604 | Resp. to device overload (Ixt)
Response if the adjustable device utilisation threshold (C00123) is reached.
• The current device utilisation is displayed in C00064.
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
0 No Reaction
1 Fault
4 WarningLocked
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00606
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 23969d = 5DA1h
C00606 | Resp. to motor overload (I²xt)
Response if the adjustable motor overload threshold (C00120) is reached.
• The current thermal motor load is displayed in C00066.
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
0 No Reaction
1 Fault
4 WarningLocked
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00620
Parameter | Name:
Scaling factor: 1
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 23955d = 5D93h
C00620 | 16-bit system connection
Connection parameters: 16-bit inputs
• Selection of the 16-bit output signals for connection with the 16-bit input signals.
• The selection list contains all 16-bit output signals which can be assigned to the 16-bit inputs mapped by the
subcodes.
Selection list
Info
0 Not connected
1 C_nPos100_a(100.0%)
2 C_nNeg100_a(-100.0%)
3 C_nPos199_9_a(199.9%)
4 C_nNeg199_9_a(-199.9%)
5 C_w65535
6 C_wDriveCtrl
10 AIn1_Out
20 nPar1_a
21 nPar2_a
22 nPar3_a
23 nPar4_a
24 LS_Keypad_nTorqueMotLim_a
25 LS_Keypad_nTorqueGenLim_a
26 LS_Keypad_nMainSetValue_a
50 LA_NCTRL_nMotorFreqAct_a
51 LA_NCTRL_nOutputSpeedCtrl_a
52 LA_NCtrl_nMotorSpeedAct_a
53 LA_NCtrl_nMotor Voltage_a
54 LA_NCtrl_nDCVoltage_a
55 LA_NCtrl_nMotorCurrent_a
216
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00621
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 23955d = 5D93h
C00620 | 16-bit system connection
56 LA_NCtrl_nMotorTorqueAct_a
57 LA_NCTRL_nHeatsinkTemperature_
a
70 LA_NCTRL_wDeviceStateWord
71 LA_NCTRL_wDeviceAuxStateWord
72 LA_NCTRL_wDetermFailNoLow
73 LA_NCTRL_wDetermFailNoHigh
Subcodes
Lenze setting
Info
C00620/1
0: Not connected
Reserved
C00620/2
0: Not connected
Reserved
C00620/3
0: Not connected
Reserved
C00620/4
0: Not connected
Reserved
C00620/5
0: Not connected
LS_DisFree: wDis1
C00620/6
0: Not connected
LS_DisFree: wDis2
C00620/7
0: Not connected
LS_DisFree: wDis3
C00620/8
0: Not connected
LS_DisFree: wDis4
C00620/9
0: Not connected
LS_DisFree_a: nDis1_a
C00620/10
0: Not connected
LS_DisFree_a: nDis2_a
C00620/11
0: Not connected
LS_DisFree_a: nDis3_a
C00620/12
0: Not connected
LS_DisFree_a: nDis4_a
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00621
Parameter | Name:
Scaling factor: 1
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 23954d = 5D92h
C00621 | Bool system connection
Connection parameters: Binary inputs
• Selection of the binary output signals for connection with the binary input signals.
• The selection list contains all binary output signals which can be assigned to the binary inputs mapped by the
subcodes.
Selection list
Info
0 Not connected
1 C_bTrue
11 DigIn_bIn1
12 DigIn_bIn2
13 DigIn_bIn3
14 DigIn_bIn4
15 DigIn_CInh
20 bPar1
21 bPar2
22 bPar3
23 bPar4
24 bPar5
25 bPar6
26 bPar7
27 bPar8
28 bPar9
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
217
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00621
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 23954d = 5D92h
C00621 | Bool system connection
29 bPar10
30 bPar11
31 bPar12
32 bPar13
33 bPar14
34 bPar15
35 bPar16
36 LS_Keypad_bSetQuickstop
37 LS_Keypad_bSetDCBrake
38 LS_Keypad_bSetSpeedCcw
39 LS_Keypad_bJogSpeed1
40 LS_Keypad_bJogSpeed2
50 LA_nCtrl_bDriveFail
51 LA_nCtrl_bDriveReady
52 LA_nCtrl_bCInhActive
53 LA_nCtrl_bQSPIsActive
54 LA_NCtrl_bSafeTorqueOff
55 LA_NCtrl_bSafetyIsActive
60 LA_nCtrl_bSpeedCcw
61 LA_nCtrl_bActSpeedEqZero
62 LA_nCtrl_bSpeedSetReached
63 LA_nCtrl_bSpeedActEqSet
64 LA_nCtrl_bNActCompare
65 LA_nCtrl_bImaxActive
66 LA_nCtrl_bHeatSinkWarning
67 LA_nCtrl_bOVDetected
68 LA_nCtrl_bDCBrakeOn
69 LA_NCtrl_bFlyingSyncActive
70 Ain_bCurrentErrorIn1
Subcodes
218
Lenze setting
Info
C00621/1
50: LA_nCtrl_bDriveFail
LS_DigitalOutput: bRelay
C00621/2
51: LA_nCtrl_bDriveReady
LS_DigitalOutput: bOut1
C00621/3
0: Not connected
Reserved
C00621/4
0: Not connected
Reserved
C00621/5
0: Not connected
Reserved
C00621/6
64: LA_nCtrl_bNActCompare
USER LED
C00621/7
0: Not connected
LA_NCtrl: bStatusBit0
C00621/8
65: LA_nCtrl_bImaxActive
LA_NCtrl: bStatusBit2
C00621/9
62: LA_nCtrl_bSpeedSetReached
LA_NCtrl: bStatusBit3
C00621/10
63: LA_nCtrl_bSpeedActEqSet
LA_NCtrl: bStatusBit4
C00621/11
64: LA_nCtrl_bNActCompare
LA_NCtrl: bStatusBit5
C00621/12
60: LA_nCtrl_bSpeedCcw
LA_NCtrl: bStatusBit14
C00621/13
51: LA_nCtrl_bDriveReady
LA_NCtrl: bStatusBit15
C00621/14
0: Not connected
Reserved
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00700
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 23954d = 5D92h
C00621 | Bool system connection
C00621/15
0: Not connected
Reserved
C00621/16
0: Not connected
Ls_DisFree_b: bDis1
C00621/17
0: Not connected
Ls_DisFree_b: bDis2
C00621/18
0: Not connected
Ls_DisFree_b: bDis3
C00621/19
0: Not connected
Ls_DisFree_b: bDis4
C00621/20
0: Not connected
Ls_DisFree_b: bDis5
C00621/21
0: Not connected
Ls_DisFree_b: bDis6
C00621/22
0: Not connected
Ls_DisFree_b: bDis7
C00621/23
0: Not connected
Ls_DisFree_b: bDis8
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00700
Parameter | Name:
Scaling factor: 1
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 23875d = 5D43h
C00700 | LA_NCtrl: analog connection list
Connection parameters for "Actuating drive - speed" application: 16-bit inputs
• Selection of the 16-bit output signals for connection with the 16-bit input signals
• The selection list contains all 16-bit output signals which can be assigned to the 16-bit inputs mapped by the
subcodes.
Selection list
Info
0 Not connected
1 C_nPos100_a(100.0%)
2 C_nNeg100_a(-100.0%)
3 C_nPos199_9_a(199.9%)
4 C_nNeg199_9_a(-199.9%)
5 C_w65535
6 C_wDriveCtrl
10 AIn1_Out
20 nPar1_a
21 nPar2_a
22 nPar3_a
23 nPar4_a
24 LS_Keypad_nTorqueMotLim_a
25 LS_Keypad_nTorqueGenLim_a
26 LS_Keypad_nMainSetValue_a
50 LA_NCTRL_nMotorFreqAct_a
51 LA_NCTRL_nOutputSpeedCtrl_a
52 LA_NCtrl_nMotorSpeedAct_a
53 LA_NCtrl_nMotor Voltage_a
54 LA_NCtrl_nDCVoltage_a
55 LA_NCtrl_nMotorCurrent_a
56 LA_NCtrl_nMotorTorqueAct_a
57 LA_NCTRL_nHeatsinkTemperature_
a
70 LA_NCTRL_wDeviceStateWord
71 LA_NCTRL_wDeviceAuxStateWord
72 LA_NCTRL_wDetermFailNoLow
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
219
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00701
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 23875d = 5D43h
C00700 | LA_NCtrl: analog connection list
73 LA_NCTRL_wDetermFailNoHigh
Subcodes
Lenze setting
Info
C00700/1
10: AIn1_Out
LA_NCtrl: nMainSetValue_a
C00700/2
22: nPar3_a
LA_NCtrl: nTorqueMotLim_a
C00700/3
22: nPar3_a
LA_NCtrl: nTorqueGenLim_a
C00700/4
0: Not connected
Reserved
C00700/5
0: Not connected
Reserved
C00700/6
1: C_nPos100_a(100.0%)
LA_NCtrl: nPIDVpAdapt_a
C00700/7
0: Not connected
LA_NCtrl: nPIDActValue_a
C00700/8
1: C_nPos100_a(100.0%)
LA_NCtrl: nPIDInfluence_a
C00700/9
0: Not connected
LA_NCtrl: nPIDsetValue_a
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00701
Parameter | Name:
Scaling factor: 1
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 23874d = 5D42h
C00701 | LA_NCtrl: digital connection list
Connection parameters for "Actuating drive - speed" application: Binary inputs
• Selection of the binary output signals for connection with the binary input signals
• The selection list contains all binary output signals which can be assigned to the binary inputs mapped by the
subcodes.
Selection list
Info
0 Not connected
1 C_bTrue
11 DigIn_bIn1
12 DigIn_bIn2
13 DigIn_bIn3
14 DigIn_bIn4
15 DigIn_CInh
20 bPar1
21 bPar2
22 bPar3
23 bPar4
24 bPar5
25 bPar6
26 bPar7
27 bPar8
28 bPar9
29 bPar10
30 bPar11
31 bPar12
32 bPar13
33 bPar14
34 bPar15
35 bPar16
36 LS_Keypad_bSetQuickstop
37 LS_Keypad_bSetDCBrake
220
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00701
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 23874d = 5D42h
C00701 | LA_NCtrl: digital connection list
38 LS_Keypad_bSetSpeedCcw
39 LS_Keypad_bJogSpeed1
40 LS_Keypad_bJogSpeed2
50 LA_nCtrl_bDriveFail
51 LA_nCtrl_bDriveReady
52 LA_nCtrl_bCInhActive
53 LA_nCtrl_bQSPIsActive
54 LA_NCtrl_bSafeTorqueOff
55 LA_NCtrl_bSafetyIsActive
60 LA_nCtrl_bSpeedCcw
61 LA_nCtrl_bActSpeedEqZero
62 LA_nCtrl_bSpeedSetReached
63 LA_nCtrl_bSpeedActEqSet
64 LA_nCtrl_bNActCompare
65 LA_nCtrl_bImaxActive
66 LA_nCtrl_bHeatSinkWarning
67 LA_nCtrl_bOVDetected
68 LA_nCtrl_bDCBrakeOn
69 LA_NCtrl_bFlyingSyncActive
70 Ain_bCurrentErrorIn1
Subcodes
Lenze setting
Info
C00701/1
0: Not connected
LA_NCtrl: bCInh
C00701/2
15: DigIn_CInh
LA_NCtrl: bFailReset
C00701/3
0: Not connected
LA_NCtrl: bSetQuickstop
C00701/4
13: DigIn_bIn3
LA_NCtrl: bSetDCBrake
C00701/5
14: DigIn_bIn4
LA_NCtrl: bSetSpeedCcw
C00701/6
11: DigIn_bIn1
LA_NCtrl: bJogSpeed1
C00701/7
12: DigIn_bIn2
LA_NCtrl: bJogSpeed2
C00701/8
0: Not connected
LA_NCtrl: bMPotUp
C00701/9
0: Not connected
LA_NCtrl: bMPotDown
C00701/10
0: Not connected
LA_NCtrl: bMPotInAct
C00701/11
0: Not connected
LA_NCtrl: bMPotEnable
C00701/12
0: Not connected
LA_NCtrl: bRFG_0
C00701/13
0: Not connected
LA_NCtrl: bSetError1
C00701/14
0: Not connected
LA_NCtrl: bSetError2
C00701/15
1: C_bTrue
LA_NCtrl: bPIDInfluenceRamp
C00701/16
0: Not connected
LA_NCtrl: bPIDIOff
C00701/17
1: C_bTrue
LA_NCtrl: bRLQCw
C00701/18
0: Not connected
LA_NCtrl: bRLQCcw
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
Scaling factor: 1
221
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00725
C00725
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 23850d = 5D2Ah
C00725 | Current switching frequency
From version 03.00.00
Display of the current switching frequency
• When a variable switching frequency is selected in C00018, the switching frequency may change as a function
of the load and rotational frequency.
Selection list (read only)
1 4 kHz var./drive-optimised
2 8 kHz var./drive-optimised
3 16 kHz var./drive-optimised
5 2 kHz constant/drive-optimised
6 4 kHz constant/drive-optimised
7 8 kHz constant/drive-optimised
8 16 kHz constant/drive-optimised
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00727
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 23848d = 5D28h
C00727 | LS_Keypad: Digital values
Executing control commands when operating via keypad
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0
1
Subcodes
Lenze setting
Info
C00727/1
0
"1" ≡ request quick stop
C00727/2
0
"1" ≡ request DC-injection braking
C00727/3
0
"1" ≡ request reversal
C00727/4
0
"1" ≡ request fixed speed setpoint 1
C00727/5
0
"1" ≡ request fixed speed setpoint 2
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00728
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 23847d = 5D27h
C00728 | LS_Keypad: Keypad analog values
Selection of different setpoints when operating via keypad
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-199.9
%
199.9
Subcodes
Lenze setting
Info
C00728/1
100.0 %
Torque limit in motor mode
C00728/2
100.0 %
Torque limit in generator mode
C00728/3
0.0 %
Setpoint speed
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00800
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 23775d = 5CDFh
C00800 | L_MPot_1: Upper limit
FB L_MPot_1: Upper limit of the motor potentiometer function
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-199.9
%
Lenze setting
199.9 100.0 %
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
222
L
Scaling factor: 100
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00801
C00801
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 23774d = 5CDEh
C00801 | L_MPot_1: Lower limit
FB L_MPot_1: Lower limit of the motor potentiometer function
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-199.9
Lenze setting
%
199.9 -100.0 %
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00802
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 23773d = 5CDDh
C00802 | L_MPot_1: Acceleration time
FB L_MPot_1: Acceleration time of the motor potentiometer function
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.1
Lenze setting
s
999.9 10.0 s
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00803
Scaling factor: 10
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 23772d = 5CDCh
C00803 | L_MPot_1: Deceleration time
FB L_MPot_1: Deceleration time of the motor potentiometer function
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.1
Lenze setting
s
999.9 10.0 s
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00804
Scaling factor: 10
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 23771d = 5CDBh
C00804 | L_MPot_1: Inactive function
FB L_MPot_1: Selection of the response when deactivating the motor potentiometer via the bInAct input
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
Info
0 Keep value
Keep output value
1 Deceleration to 0
Deceleration via ramp to 0
2 Deceleration to lower limit
Deceleration via ramp via the lower limit (C00801)
3 Without ramp to 0
Jump to 0
4 Without ramp to lower limit
Jump to lower limit (C00800)
5 Acceleration to upper limit
Acceleration via ramp to upper limit (C00800)
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00805
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 23770d = 5CDAh
C00805 | L_MPot_1: Init fct.
FB L_MPot_1: Selection of the response when switching on the device
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
0 Load last value
1 U. Load limit
2 Load 0
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
Scaling factor: 1
223
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00806
C00806
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 23769d = 5CD9h
C00806 | L_MPot_1: Use
FB L_MPot_1: Application of motor potentiometer
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
Info
0 No
The motor potentiometer is not used.
• The analog value applied to the nIn_a input is looped
through without any changes to the nOut_a output.
1 Yes
The motor potentiometer is used.
• The analog value applied to the nIn_a input is led via
the motor potentiometer and provided at the nOut_a
output.
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00830
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 23745d = 5CC1h
C00830 | 16Bit-Input analog
Display in percent of 16-bit input values of different blocks
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-199.9
%
199.9
Subcodes
Info
C00830/1
L_NSet_1: nNSet_a
C00830/2
L_NSet: nOut_a
C00830/3
LS_MCTRL: nSpeedSetValue_a
C00830/4
LS_MCTRL: nTorqueMotLimit_a
C00830/5
LS_MCTRL: nTorqueGenLimit_a
C00830/6
L_PCTRL_1: nAct_a
C00830/7
L_PCTRL_1: nAdapt_a
C00830/8
L_PCTRL_1: nSet_a
C00830/9
L_PCTRL_1: nInflu_a
C00830/10
L_PCTRL_1: nNSet_a
C00830/11
L_MPot_1: nIn_a
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00831
Scaling factor: 100
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 23744d = 5CC0h
C00831 | 16Bit-Input common
From version 03.00.00
Decimal/hexadecimal/bit-coded display of 16-bit input values of different blocks
Display range (min. hex value | max. hex value)
0x0000
0xFFFF
Value is bit-coded:
Bit 0 Bit0
... ...
Bit 15 Bit15
Subcodes
Info
C00831/1
LS_DCTRL: wCANControl
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
224
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00833
C00833
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 23742d = 5CBEh
C00833 | 8Bit-Input
From version 03.00.00
Display of the signal status of the binary inputs of different blocks
Selection list
0 False
1 True
Subcodes
Info
C00833/1
L_NSet_1: bRfg0
C00833/2
L_NSet_1: bNSetInv
C00833/3
L_NSet_1: bJog1
C00833/4
L_NSet_1: bJog2
C00833/5
LS_SetError_1: bSetError1
C00833/6
LS_SetError_1: bSetError2
C00833/7
L_MPot_1: bUp
C00833/8
L_MPot_1: bInAct
C00833/9
L_MPot_1: bDown
C00833/10
L_MPot_1: bEnable
C00833/11
Reserved
C00833/12
L_PCTRL_1: bIOff
C00833/13
L_PCTRL_1: bEnableInfluenceRamp
C00833/14
LS_DCTRL: bCINH
C00833/15
LS_DCTRL: bFailReset
C00833/16
LS_DCTRL: bStatus_B0
C00833/17
LS_DCTRL: bStatus_B2
C00833/18
LS_DCTRL: bStatus_B3
C00833/19
LS_DCTRL: bStatus_B4
C00833/20
LS_DCTRL: bStatus_B5
C00833/21
LS_DCTRL: bStatus_B14
C00833/22
LS_DCTRL: bStatus_B15
C00833/23
L_RLQ_1: bCw
C00833/24
L_RLQ_1: bCcw
; Read access … Write access … CINH … PLC STOP ; No transfer … COM … MOT
C00909
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 23666d = 5C72h
C00909 | Speed limitation
Maximum positive/negative speed for all operating modes
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0
%
175.0
Subcodes
Lenze setting
Info
C00909/1
120.0 %
Max. pos. speed
C00909/2
120.0 %
Max. neg. speed
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
Scaling factor: 100
225
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Parameter list | C00910
C00910
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 23665d = 5C71h
C00910 | Frequency limitation
Maximum positive/negative output frequency for all operating modes
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0
Hz
300
Subcodes
Lenze setting
Info
C00910/1
300 Hz
Max. pos. output frequency
C00910/2
300 Hz
Max. neg. output frequency
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00990
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_8
Index: 23585d = 5C21h
C00990 | Flying restart fct.: Activation
Switch on/activate flying restart circuit for non-feedback drive systems
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
0 Off
1 On
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00991
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: UNSIGNED_16
Index: 23584d = 5C20h
C00991 | Flying restart fct.: Process
Selection of the starting value and the speed search range for the flying restart function
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
5 -n...+n | Last output frequency
6 -n...+n | Actual setpoint frequency
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00992
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 23583d = 5C1Fh
C00992 | Flying restart: start frequency
Selection of the starting value for the flying restart function
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-200
Hz
Lenze setting
200 10 Hz
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
C00994
Scaling factor: 1
Parameter | Name:
Data type: INTEGER_16
Index: 23581d = 5C1Dh
C00994 | Flying restart fct.: Current
Current to be injected during the flying restart process
• 100 % ≡ rated motor current (C00081).
• The flying restart current is to amount to 10 ... 25 % of the rated motor current.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0
%
Lenze setting
100.0 25.0 %
; Read access ; Write access … CINH … PLC STOP … No transfer … COM … MOT
226
L
Scaling factor: 100
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Table of attributes | C00994
10.3
Table of attributes
The table of attributes contains information required for a communication with the
controller via parameters.
How to read the table of attributes:
Column
Meaning
Entry
Code
Parameter designation
Cxxxxx
Name
Index
Data
Parameter short text (display text)
Text
24575 - Lenze code
hex
Index under which the parameter is addressed.
The subindex for array variables corresponds to the
Lenze subcode number.
DS
Data structure
E
Single variable
(only one parameter element)
A
Array variable
(several parameter elements)
dec
DA
Number of array elements (subcodes)
DT
Data type
Factor
Access
Code
5FFFh - Lenze code number
Is only required for access via a bus
system.
Number
BITFIELD_8
1 byte bit-coded
BITFIELD_16
2 byte bit-coded
BITFIELD_32
4 byte bit-coded
INTEGER_8
1 byte with sign
INTEGER_16
2 byte with sign
INTEGER_32
4 byte with sign
UNSIGNED_8
1 byte without sign
UNSIGNED_16
2 byte without sign
UNSIGNED_32
4 byte without sign
VISIBLE_STRING
ASCII string
Factor for data transmission via a bus system,
depending on the number of decimal positions
Factor
1 ≡ no decimal positions
10 ≡ 1 decimal position
100 ≡ 2 decimal positions
1000 ≡ 3 decimal positions
R
Read access
; Reading permitted
W
Write access
; Writing permitted
CINH
Controller inhibit required
; Writing is only possible if controller inhibit is set
Name
Index
Data
dec
hex
DS
DA
DT
Access
Factor
R
W
;
C00002
Controller commands
24573
5FFD
A
32
UNSIGNED_8
1
;
C00003
Status of last device command
24572
5FFC
E
1
UNSIGNED_8
1
;
C00006
Select motor control
24569
5FF9
E
1
UNSIGNED_8
1
;
;
C00007
Select control mode
24568
5FF8
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
1
;
;
C00010
Minimum analog setpoint
24565
5FF5
A
1
INTEGER_16
100
;
;
C00011
Appl.: Reference speed
24564
5FF4
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
1
;
;
C00012
Accel. time - main setpoint
24563
5FF3
E
1
UNSIGNED_32
1000
;
;
C00013
Decel. time - main setpoint
24562
5FF2
E
1
UNSIGNED_32
1000
;
;
C00015
VFC: V/f base frequency
24560
5FF0
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
10
;
;
C00016
VFC: Vmin boost
24559
5FEF
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
100
;
;
C00018
Switching frequency
24557
5FED
E
1
UNSIGNED_8
1
;
;
C00019
Auto-DCB: Threshold
24556
5FEC
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
1
;
;
C00021
Slip comp.
24554
5FEA
E
1
INTEGER_16
100
;
;
C00022
Imax in motor mode
24553
5FE9
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
100
;
;
C00023
Imax in generator mode
24552
5FE8
E
1
INTEGER_16
100
;
;
C00024
Comparison value N_Act
24551
5FE7
E
1
INTEGER_16
100
;
;
C00026
AINx: Offset
24549
5FE5
A
1
INTEGER_16
100
;
;
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
CINH
227
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Table of attributes | C00994
Code
228
Name
Index
Data
dec
hex
DS
DA
24548
5FE4
A
1
DT
R
W
100
;
;
C00027
AINx: Gain
C00028
AINx: Input voltage
24547
5FE3
A
1
INTEGER_16
100
;
C00029
AINx: Input current
24546
5FE2
A
1
INTEGER_16
100
;
C00033
AINx: Output value
24542
5FDE
A
1
INTEGER_16
100
;
C00034
AINx: Configuration
24541
5FDD
A
1
UNSIGNED_8
1
;
;
C00036
DCB: Current
24539
5FDB
E
1
INTEGER_16
100
;
;
C00039
Fixed setpoint x (L_NSet_1 n-Fix)
24536
5FD8
A
3
INTEGER_16
100
;
;
C00050
MCTRL: Speed setpoint
24525
5FCD
E
1
INTEGER_32
1
;
C00051
MCTRL: Actual speed value
24524
5FCC
E
1
INTEGER_32
1
;
C00052
Motor voltage
24523
5FCB
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
1
;
C00053
DC-bus voltage
24522
5FCA
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
1
;
C00054
Motor current
24521
5FC9
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
100
;
C00056
Torque
24519
5FC7
A
2
INTEGER_32
100
;
C00057
Maximum torque
24518
5FC6
E
1
UNSIGNED_32
100
;
C00058
Output frequency
24517
5FC5
E
1
INTEGER_32
100
;
C00059
Appl.: Reference frequency C11
24516
5FC4
E
1
UNSIGNED_32
100
;
C00061
Heatsink temperature
24514
5FC2
E
1
INTEGER_16
1
;
C00064
Device utilisation (Ixt)
24511
5FBF
A
3
INTEGER_16
100
;
C00066
Thermal motor load (I²xt)
24509
5FBD
E
1
INTEGER_16
100
;
C00073
Vp Imax controller
24502
5FB6
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
100
;
;
C00074
Ti Imax controller
24501
5FB5
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
1
;
;
C00081
Rated motor power
24494
5FAE
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
100
;
;
C00084
Motor stator resistance
24491
5FAB
E
1
UNSIGNED_32
1
;
;
C00085
Motor stator leakage inductance
24490
5FAA
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
100
;
;
C00087
Rated motor speed
24488
5FA8
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
1
;
;
C00088
Rated motor current
24487
5FA7
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
100
;
;
C00089
Rated motor frequency
24486
5FA6
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
1
;
;
C00090
Rated motor voltage
24485
5FA5
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
1
;
;
C00091
Motor cosine phi
24484
5FA4
E
1
UNSIGNED_8
100
;
;
C00092
Motor magnetizing inductance
24483
5FA3
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
10
;
;
C00093
Power section ID
24482
5FA2
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
1
;
C00094
Password
24481
5FA1
E
1
INTEGER_32
1
;
C00095
Motor magnetising current
24480
5FA0
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
100
;
C00097
Rated motor torque
24478
5F9E
E
1
UNSIGNED_32
100
;
C00098
Rated device current
24477
5F9D
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
10
C00099
Firmware version
24476
5F9C
E
1
VISIBLE_STRING
C00100
Firmware version
24475
5F9B
A
4
UNSIGNED_8
1
;
C00105
Deceleration time - quick stop
24470
5F96
E
1
UNSIGNED_32
1000
;
;
C00106
Auto-DCB: hold time
24469
5F95
E
1
UNSIGNED_32
1000
;
;
C00107
DCB: hold time
24468
5F94
E
1
UNSIGNED_32
1000
;
;
C00114
DIx inversion
24461
5F8D
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
;
;
C00118
DOx inversion
24457
5F89
E
1
UNSIGNED_8
;
;
C00120
Motor overload threshold (I²xt)
24455
5F87
E
1
INTEGER_16
100
;
;
C00123
Device utilisat. threshold (Ixt)
24452
5F84
E
1
INTEGER_16
100
;
;
C00134
Ramp rounding - main setpoint
24441
5F79
E
1
UNSIGNED_8
1
;
;
C00137
Device state
24438
5F76
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
1
;
C00141
Device settings
24434
5F72
A
1
UNSIGNED_8
1
;
;
C00142
Auto-start option
24433
5F71
E
1
UNSIGNED_8
;
;
C00144
Switching freq. reduct. (temp.)
24431
5F6F
E
1
UNSIGNED_8
;
;
C00150
Status word
24425
5F69
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
;
C00155
Status word 2
24420
5F64
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
;
L
INTEGER_32
Access
Factor
CINH
;
;
;
1
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Table of attributes
Code
Name
Index
Data
dec
hex
DS
DA
24417
5F61
E
1
DT
Access
Factor
UNSIGNED_16
R
W
CINH
;
;
;
;
;
C00158
Cause of controller inhibit
C00159
Cause of quick stop QSP
24416
5F60
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
;
C00165
Error information
24410
5F5A
A
1
VISIBLE_STRING
;
C00166
Error information text
24409
5F59
A
3
VISIBLE_STRING
;
C00168
Error number
24407
5F57
A
8
UNSIGNED_32
1
;
C00169
Time of error
24406
5F56
A
8
UNSIGNED_32
1
;
C00170
Error counter
24405
5F55
A
8
UNSIGNED_8
1
;
C00173
Mains voltage
24402
5F52
E
1
UNSIGNED_8
1
C00174
Reduced brake chopper threshold
24401
5F51
E
1
UNSIGNED_8
1
C00177
Switching cycles
24398
5F4E
A
2
UNSIGNED_32
1
;
C00178
Elapsed-hour meter
24397
5F4D
E
1
UNSIGNED_32
1
;
C00179
Power-on time meter
24396
5F4C
E
1
UNSIGNED_32
1
;
C00182
S-ramp time PT1
24393
5F49
E
1
INTEGER_16
100
;
C00200
Firmware product type
24375
5F37
E
1
VISIBLE_STRING
;
C00201
Firmware compile date
24374
5F36
E
1
VISIBLE_STRING
;
C00203
Product type code
24372
5F34
A
9
VISIBLE_STRING
C00222
L_PCTRL_1: Vp
24353
5F21
E
1
INTEGER_16
C00223
L_PCTRL_1: Tn
24352
5F20
E
1
C00224
L_PCTRL_1: Kd
24351
5F1F
E
C00225
L_PCTRL_1: MaxLimit
24350
5F1E
C00226
L_PCTRL_1: MinLimit
24349
C00227
L_PCTRL_1: acceleration time
24348
C00228
L_PCTRL_1: deceleration time
C00231
;
;
;
10
;
;
UNSIGNED_16
1
;
;
1
UNSIGNED_16
10
;
;
E
1
INTEGER_16
100
;
;
5F1D
E
1
INTEGER_16
100
;
;
5F1C
E
1
UNSIGNED_32
1000
;
;
24347
5F1B
E
1
UNSIGNED_32
1000
;
;
L_PCTRL_1: Operating range
24344
5F18
A
4
INTEGER_16
100
;
;
C00234
Oscillation damping influence
24341
5F15
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
100
;
;
C00242
L_PCTRL_1: operating mode
24333
5F0D
E
1
UNSIGNED_8
1
;
;
C00243
L_PCTRL_1: Acceleration time
influence
24332
5F0C
E
1
UNSIGNED_32
1000
;
;
C00244
L_PCTRL_1: Deceleration time
influence
24331
5F0B
E
1
UNSIGNED_32
1000
;
;
C00245
L_PCTRL_1: PID output value
24330
5F0A
E
1
INTEGER_16
100
;
C00443
DIx: Level
24132
5E44
A
2
UNSIGNED_16
C00444
DOx: Level
24131
5E43
A
2
UNSIGNED_16
C00470
LS_ParFree_b
24105
5E29
A
16
UNSIGNED_8
C00472
LS_ParFree_a
24103
5E27
A
4
INTEGER_16
C00480
LS_DisFree_b
24095
5E1F
E
1
UNSIGNED_8
C00481
LS_DisFree
24094
5E1E
A
4
UNSIGNED_16
C00482
LS_DisFree_a
24093
5E1D
A
4
INTEGER_16
C00516
Checksums
24059
5DFB
A
1
C00517
User menu
24058
5DFA
A
C00565
Resp. to mains phase failure
24010
5DCA
C00574
Resp. to brake resist. overtemp.
24001
5DC1
C00581
Resp. LS_SetError_x
23994
C00598
Resp. to open circuit AINx
C00600
;
;
1
;
;
100
;
;
;
;
100
;
UNSIGNED_32
1
;
20
INTEGER_32
1
;
;
E
1
UNSIGNED_8
1
;
;
E
1
UNSIGNED_8
1
;
;
5DBA
A
2
UNSIGNED_8
1
;
;
23977
5DA9
A
1
UNSIGNED_8
1
;
;
Resp. to DC bus undervoltage
23975
5DA7
A
1
UNSIGNED_8
1
;
;
C00601
Del.resp. to fault: DC bus overvoltage
23974
5DA6
A
1
UNSIGNED_16
1000
;
;
C00604
Resp. to device overload (Ixt)
23971
5DA3
E
1
UNSIGNED_8
1
;
;
C00606
Resp. to motor overload (I²xt)
23969
5DA1
E
1
UNSIGNED_8
1
;
;
C00620
16-bit system connection
23955
5D93
A
12
UNSIGNED_16
1
;
;
C00621
Bool system connection
23954
5D92
A
23
UNSIGNED_16
1
;
;
C00700
LA_NCtrl: analog connection list
23875
5D43
A
9
UNSIGNED_16
1
;
;
C00701
LA_NCtrl: digital connection list
23874
5D42
A
18
UNSIGNED_16
1
;
;
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
229
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Parameter reference
Table of attributes
Code
230
Name
Index
Data
dec
hex
DS
DA
DT
C00725
Current switching frequency
23850
5D2A
E
1
UNSIGNED_8
C00727
LS_Keypad: Digital values
23848
5D28
A
5
UNSIGNED_8
C00728
LS_Keypad: Keypad analog values
23847
5D27
A
3
INTEGER_16
C00800
L_MPot_1: Upper limit
23775
5CDF
E
1
INTEGER_16
C00801
L_MPot_1: Lower limit
23774
5CDE
E
1
INTEGER_16
C00802
L_MPot_1: Acceleration time
23773
5CDD
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
C00803
L_MPot_1: Deceleration time
23772
5CDC
E
1
C00804
L_MPot_1: Inactive function
23771
5CDB
E
C00805
L_MPot_1: Init fct.
23770
5CDA
C00806
L_MPot_1: Use
23769
C00830
16Bit input analog
C00831
16Bit-Input common
C00833
8Bit-Input
23742
C00909
Speed limitation
23666
C00910
Frequency limitation
23665
C00990
Flying restart fct: Activation
C00991
Access
Factor
R
W
1
;
1
;
;
100
;
;
100
;
;
100
;
;
10
;
;
UNSIGNED_16
10
;
;
1
UNSIGNED_8
1
;
;
E
1
UNSIGNED_8
1
;
;
5CD9
E
1
UNSIGNED_8
1
;
;
23745
5CC1
A
11
INTEGER_16
100
;
23744
5CC0
A
1
UNSIGNED_16
5CBE
A
24
UNSIGNED_8
5C72
A
2
INTEGER_16
5C71
A
2
23585
5C21
E
Flying restart fct: Process
23584
5C20
C00992
Flying restart: start frequency
23583
C00994
Flying restart fct: Current
23581
;
1
;
100
;
;
UNSIGNED_16
1
;
;
1
UNSIGNED_8
1
;
;
E
1
UNSIGNED_16
1
;
;
5C1F
E
1
INTEGER_16
1
;
;
5C1D
E
1
INTEGER_16
100
;
;
L
CINH
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Index
11
Index
Zahlen
C150 200
C155 201
C158 202
C159 203
C16 186
C165 203
C166 203
C167 203
C168 204
C169 204
C170 205
C171 205
C173 205
C174 205
C177 205
C178 206
C179 206
C18 187
C182 154,
C19 187
C2 182
C200 206
C201 206
C203 206
C21 187
C22 187
C222 162,
C223 207
C224 162,
C225 163,
C226 163,
C227 163,
C228 163,
C23 188
C231 208
C234 208
C235 208
C236 208
C24 188
C242 163,
C243 163,
C244 163,
C245 209
C26 188
C27 188
C28 188
C29 189
C3 184
C33 189
C34 189
C36 189
16-bit system connection (C00620) 216
16Bit-Input analog (C00830) 224
16Bit-Input common (C00831) 224
8Bit-Input (C00833) 225
A
Accel. time - main setpoint (C00012) 186
AINx
Configuration (C00034) 189
Gain (C00027) 188
Input current (C00029) 189
Input voltage (C00028) 188
Offset (C00026) 188
Output value (C00033) 189
Analog input 116
Appl.
Reference frequency C11 (C00059) 191
Reference speed (C00011) 186
Application notes 12
Assigning signal sources 220
Assignment of digital inputs 220
Auto-DCB
Hold time (C00106) 196
Threshold (C00019) 187
Auto-start option (C00142) 199
B
Bool system connection (C00621) 217
C
C012 154
C013 154
C039 154
C10 185
C100 195
C105 195
C106 196
C107 196
C11 186
C114 196
C118 197
C12 186
C120 197
C123 197
C13 186
C134 154, 197
C137 198
C141 198
C142 199
C144 199
C15 186
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
206
207
207
207
207
207
208
209
209
209
231
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Index
C39 190
C443 210
C444 211
C470 172,
C472 173,
C480 170,
C481 168,
C482 169,
C50 190
C51 190
C516 213
C517 214
C52 190
C53 190
C54 191
C56 191
C565 214
C57 191
C574 214
C58 191
C581 215
C59 191
C598 215
C6 184
C600 215
C601 215
C604 216
C606 216
C61 191
C620 168,
C621 150,
C64 192
C66 192
C7 185
C700 149,
C701 149,
C725 222
C727 222
C728 222
C73 192
C74 192
C800 158,
C801 158,
C802 158,
C803 158,
C804 158,
C805 158,
C806 224
C81 192
C830 224
C831 224
C833 225
C84 193
232
C85 193
C87 193
C88 193
C89 193
C90 194
C909 225
C91 194
C910 226
C92 194
C93 194
C94 194
C95 194
C97 195
C98 195
C99 195
C990 226
C991 226
C992 226
C994 226
Cause for quick stop QSP (C00159) 203
Cause of controller inhibit (C00158) 202
Checksums (C00516) 213
Comparison value N_Act (C00024) 188
Conventions used 10
Current switching frequency (C00725) 222
211
212
212
212
213
D
Data type 177
DCB
Current (C00036) 189
Hold time (C00107) 196
DC-bus voltage (C00053) 190
Decel. time - main setpoint (C00013) 186
Deceleration time - quick stop (C00105) 195
Delayed resp. to fault
DC-bus overvoltage (C00601) 215
Device commands (C00002) 182
Device settings (C00141) 198
Device state (C00137) 198
Device utilisat. threshold (Ixt) (C00123) 197
Device utilisation (Ixt) (C00064) 192
Digital inputs 120
Digital outputs 122
DIx
Level (C00443) 210
DIx inversion (C00114) 196
DOx
Level (C00444) 211
DOx inversion (C00118) 197
Drive interface 47
169, 216
170, 217
157, 219
150, 153, 157, 220
222
223
223
223
223
223
E
Elapsed-hour meter (C00178) 206
E-mail to Lenze 235
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Index
Error counter (C00170) 205
Error information (C00165) 203
Error information text (C00166) 203
Error messages 134
Error messages (short overview) 137
Error number 134
Error number (C00168) 204
F
Feedback to Lenze 235
Filter time - oscill. damping (C235) 208
Firmware compile date (C00201) 206
Firmware product type (C00200) 206
Firmware version (C00099) 195
Firmware version (C00100) 195
Fixed setpoint x (L_NSet_1 n-Fix) (C00039) 190
Flying restart fct.
Activation (C00990) 226
Current (C00994) 226
Process (C00991) 226
Start frequency (C00992) 226
Flying restart function 101
Frequency limitation (C00910) 226
Function assignment 220
H
Heatsink temperature (C00061) 191
I
Imax in generator mode (C00023) 188
Imax in motor mode (C00022) 187
L
L_MPot_1
Acceleration time (C00802) 223
Deceleration time (C00803) 223
Inactive function (C00804) 223
Init fct. (C00805) 223
Lower limit (C00801) 223
Upper limit (C00800) 222
Use (C00806) 224
L_PCTRL 161
L_PCTRL_1
Acceleration time (C00227) 207
Acceleration time influence (C00243) 209
Deceleration time (C00228) 208
Deceleration time influence (C00244) 209
Kd (C00224) 207
MaxLimit (C00225) 207
MinLimit (C00226) 207
Operating mode (C00242) 209
Operating range (C00231) 208
PID output value (C00245) 209
Tn (C00223) 207
Vp (C00222) 207
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
L_RLQ 167
L_RLQ_1 167
LA_NCtrl
Analog connection list (C00700) 219
Digital connection list (C00701) 220
Layout of the safety instructions 12
Logbook access index (C171) 205
Logbook data (C167) 203
LS_AnalogInput 119
LS_DigitalInput 121
LS_DigitalOutput 123
LS_DisFree (C00481) 212
LS_DisFree_a (C00482) 213
LS_DisFree_b (C00480) 212
LS_DriveInterface 63
LS_Keypad
digital values (C00727) 222
Keypad analog values (C00728) 222
LS_MotorInterface 110
LS_ParFree_a (C00472) 212
LS_ParFree_b (C00470) 211
M
Mains voltage (C00173) 205
Maximum torque (C00057) 191
MCTRL
Actual speed value (C00051) 190
Speed setpoint (C00050) 190
Minimum analog setpoint (C00010) 185
Monitoring 132
Motor control 73
Motor cosine phi (C00091) 194
Motor current (C00054) 191
Motor magnetising current (C00095) 194
Motor magnetising inductance (C00092) 194
Motor overload threshold (I²xt) (C00120) 197
Motor parameter identification active 50
Motor stator leakage inductance (C00085) 193
Motor stator resistance (C00084) 193
Motor voltage (C00052) 190
O
Oscillation damping - field weakening (C236) 208
Oscillation damping influence (C00234) 208
Output frequency (C00058) 191
P
Password (C00094) 194
Power section ID (C00093) 194
Power-on time meter (C00179) 206
Product type code (C00203) 206
R
Ramp rounding main setpoint (C00134) 197
233
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
Index
Rated device current (C00098) 195
Rated motor current (C00088) 193
Rated motor frequency (C00089) 193
Rated motor power (C00081) 192
Rated motor speed (C00087) 193
Rated motor torque (C00097) 195
Rated motor voltage (C00090) 194
Reduced brake chopper threshold (C00174) 205
Reset of error message 136
Resp. to brake resist. overtemp. (C00574) 214
Resp. to DC bus undervoltage (C00600) 215
Resp. to device overload (Ixt) (C00604) 216
Resp. to LS_SetError_x (C00581) 215
Resp. to mains phase failure (C00565) 214
Resp. to motor overload (I²xt) (C00606) 216
Resp. to open circuit AINx (C00598) 215
S
Safety instructions 12
Schnittstellenbeschreibung_TA_NCtrl 148
Select control mode (C00007) 185
Select motor control (C00006) 184
Setting the error response 133
Short overview of error messages 137
Slip compensation (C00021) 187
Speed limitation (C00909) 225
S-ramp time PT1 (C00182) 206
Status of last device command (C00003) 184
Status word (C00150) 200
Status word 2 (C00155) 201
Switching cycles (C00177) 205
Switching frequency (C00018) 187
Switching frequency reduction (temp.) (C00144) 199
System error messages 134
T
Technology applications 141
Thermal motor load (I²xt) (C00066) 192
Ti Imax controller (C00074) 192
Time of error (C00169) 204
Torque (C00056) 191
U
User menu (C00517) 214
V
VFC
V/f base frequency (C00015) 186
Vmin boost (C00016) 186
Vp Imax controller (C00073) 192
234
L
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze
8400 BaseLine D | Software Manual
)(('%$&.
Your opinion is important to us
Your opinion is important to us
These instructions were created to the best of our knowledge
and belief to give you the best possible support for handling
our product.
If you have suggestions for improvement, please e-mail us to:
[email protected]
Thank you for your support.
Your Lenze documentation team
Firmware 03.00 - DMS EN 5.1 - 11/2009
L
235
efesotomasyon.com - Lenze

© 11/2009
)
Lenze AC Tech Corporation
630 Douglas Street
Uxbridge, MA 01569
USA
Service
Lenze Service GmbH
Breslauer Straße 3
D-32699 Extertal
Germany
+1 508 / 278-9100
00 80 00 / 24 4 68 77 (24 h helpline)
¬
+1 508 / 278-7873
¬
+49 (0) 51 54 / 82 - 11 12
|
[email protected]
|
[email protected]
Þ
www.Lenze-actech.com
EDS84AVBDxx ƒ 13292140 ƒ EN 5.1 ƒ TD06
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement